<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Liz+D</id>
	<title>Omega Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Liz+D"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Liz_D"/>
	<updated>2026-04-05T22:32:50Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.44.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wire_Function_Short_Codes&amp;diff=35</id>
		<title>Wire Function Short Codes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wire_Function_Short_Codes&amp;diff=35"/>
		<updated>2020-01-16T16:59:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:250px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Wire Function&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Code&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #1&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #2&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #3&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| All Door Trigger &lt;br /&gt;
| ADT&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Brake Light&lt;br /&gt;
| BL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  CAN HI&lt;br /&gt;
| CANH&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  CAN LO&lt;br /&gt;
| CANL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clutch Bypass &lt;br /&gt;
| CLBP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Constant 12v&lt;br /&gt;
| CP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Door Lock&lt;br /&gt;
| ADL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Door Lock Data &lt;br /&gt;
| DLD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Door Unlock &lt;br /&gt;
| ADU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| DFDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| DFWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| DFWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Rear Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| DRDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Rear Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| DRWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Driver Rear Window UP&lt;br /&gt;
| DRWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Full Tach &lt;br /&gt;
| TACH&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Headlights &lt;br /&gt;
| HL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Hazards &lt;br /&gt;
| HZ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ign. Coil (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| IGC&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #1 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #2 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #3 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition Mux &lt;br /&gt;
| IGM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Immo. Data &lt;br /&gt;
| IMD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Injector (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| INJ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Keysense &lt;br /&gt;
| KS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Front (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| DFSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Front (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| DFSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Rear (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| DRSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Rear (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| DRSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Lock Detection Wire &lt;br /&gt;
| LDT&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Motor All Unlock&lt;br /&gt;
| ADUM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Motor Driver Unlock &lt;br /&gt;
| DDUM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Moter Lock &lt;br /&gt;
| ADLM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Neutral Safety  &lt;br /&gt;
| NS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Alarm Arm &lt;br /&gt;
| OEMA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Amp Turn On &lt;br /&gt;
| OEATO&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Disarm &lt;br /&gt;
| OEMD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Hood Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| HP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Horn &lt;br /&gt;
| HRN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OWN Keyless Module &lt;br /&gt;
| RKM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Trunk Rel. Disarm &lt;br /&gt;
| OETR&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Park Brake &lt;br /&gt;
| PB&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Parking Light (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| PLN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Parking Lgiht (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| PLP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Window DOWN  &lt;br /&gt;
| PFWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| PFWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| PRWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| REWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| PFDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| PRDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Push To Start #1 &lt;br /&gt;
| PTS1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Push To Start #2 &lt;br /&gt;
| PTS2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Antenna  &lt;br /&gt;
| PANT&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Sliding Door Left &lt;br /&gt;
| PSDL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Sliding Door Right &lt;br /&gt;
| PSDR&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Radio ACC. +12V&lt;br /&gt;
| RACCP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Constant +12V &lt;br /&gt;
| RCP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Dimmer &lt;br /&gt;
| RDIM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Ground &lt;br /&gt;
| RCG&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Illumination &lt;br /&gt;
| RILL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Rear Defrost &lt;br /&gt;
| RD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Light &lt;br /&gt;
| RL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Marker Light &lt;br /&gt;
| RML&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Front (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| PFSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Front (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| PFSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Rear (-)&lt;br /&gt;
| PRSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Right Rear (+)&lt;br /&gt;
| PRSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Security Light&lt;br /&gt;
| SL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Steering Lock Angle Position&lt;br /&gt;
| SLP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Speed Sense  &lt;br /&gt;
| SS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Starter #1 &lt;br /&gt;
| ST1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Starter #2 &lt;br /&gt;
| ST2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| STSW (Starter Switch) &lt;br /&gt;
| STSW&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| SW DATA &lt;br /&gt;
| SWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Trunk Release  &lt;br /&gt;
| TREL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Trunk/Hatch Trigger &lt;br /&gt;
| THT&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Heated Seats &lt;br /&gt;
| HS&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=34</id>
		<title>70-series</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=34"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:16:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* v1.6 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=New 70 Series Features=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; - Turn the ignition &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;, immediately press the valet button 10 times. After long siren chirp/horn honk press Lock &amp;amp; Unlock together on the remote or press the Brake Pedal 5 times. The system will chirp twice and exit programming with all features set to OEM defaults.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To ignore 3D motion from antenna or sensor disconnect Neutral Safety and perform VL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;V1.6 will ignore 3D motion unless M/T reservation mode (Installer Feature #11) is set to one of the Manual Transmission options.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Vehicle Learn (See V1.6 for new process)=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If needed&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, press valet to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. (&#039;&#039;This step was left out of some early production manuals&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF The system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within 20 sec. of Step 4, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: OPTIONAL: To enable Manual Transmission Reservation mode, set the parking brake. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(The BLACK/WHITE wire must be connected to the parking brake.) System should chirp/flash lights 1x. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 8&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
*With Green/Red and Green/Black not programed as CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 (Feature 10/18) the two way remote will not confirm CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 operation but the data output (Left Sliding Door and Gas Cap) will still operate.(fixed in v1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Installer Feature #20 (Low Current Mode) does not program via WebLink. (Fixed in V1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When using AU-84TDP you must not use Black/White (Neutral Safety) and go thru VL to prevent false 3D status. (fixed in AU-84TDP firmware update)&lt;br /&gt;
*When using data module for door triggers on X70 the Zone Violation Recall will show Hood (2 Flashes) for door trigger. Door triggers report properly from data module with XX70-B. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When connected to I IGN and 2 ACC circuits VL will not learn properly. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Any time updates are done thru WebLink the current feature settings of the unit are maintained. To see new default settings you must power the brain and do a system reset.[http://wiki.uscnetwork.com/index.php?title=70-series 70-series]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.0=&lt;br /&gt;
Available July 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Original Release &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Progressive Voltage - monitor battery voltage (0.3V increase from rest) for 1 min after RS then ignore any voltage change for the remaining RS runtime&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Vehicle Learn process (See Below)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New antennas and remotes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All units have temp sensor included &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can not configure features via OmegaWebLink &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.1=&lt;br /&gt;
Available September 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct Lock operation after takeover &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Blade detection does not operate properly. If Blade flashes Red-Red-Blue-repeat the installer will need to set installer feature #12 to 2nd or 3rd option so Blade port is in iData protocol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.2=&lt;br /&gt;
Available April 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct auto data protocol select when Blade is present &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allow Lock operation during Vehicle Learn for some PTS vehicles &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct analog hood trigger input RS shutdown process in RS-X70 units &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1+1 button remotes will allow Unlock Only when programed with installer feature #13 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.3=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Latch output option for Channel 4&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
High Temp RS feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 programmable temperature settings for Low Temp starting and 4 programmable temperature settings for High Temp&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Low Volt auto start and Low Battery notification for 2-way TX set to 11.5V&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
No delay to 3rd, 4th, and 5th channel operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.4=&lt;br /&gt;
Available February 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
iData protocol updated to support Linkr-LT1 confirmations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.5=&lt;br /&gt;
Available August 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default runtime now 15 minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default protocol set to Black=iData/Green=DBI&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New TX RS activation options (user feature #8). Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 3 seconds (option 5) &amp;amp; Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 4 seconds (option 6).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(4-button &amp;amp; 2-button TX only, 1-button will be set to press 2x when these options are selected)&lt;br /&gt;
Lift gate status via data causing 3 chirps on arm fixed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pulse Ignition On Disarm (installer feature #14) will now pulse the Ignition &amp;amp; Accessory outputs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 2-way confirmation will work when Green/Red &amp;amp; Green/Black are NOT set to CH4 or CH5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Glow Plug State via iData protocol. Start time will be controlled by Glow Plug State when feature is supported by bypass module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
M/T setup (installer feature #11) mode now has 2 new options. Shut down and lock on door close (option 3) &amp;amp; Shut down and lock 10 seconds after door close (option 4)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Tach Learn process:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Start engine with the key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hold Brake pedal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press and release valet button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Entering tach learn will confirm with 5 chirps/light flashes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid tach signal is present system will set Engine Detection to Tach and learn tach&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Release Brake or turn Ignition OFF to exit tach learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Old and New Tach Learn process will switch Engine Detection feature to tach wire and learn valid tach &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid signal is present&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer reports 5 chirps after starting vehicle. New tach learn process can be triggered &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;IF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the customer pulses the brake pedal after starting the car.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.6=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2019&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not recognize 2 ACC circuits - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not setting Engine Detection (Installer Feature #3) or Data Protocol (Installer Feature #12) after update - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware version now indicated by LED upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Seconds after power up the status LED will give long and short flashes to indicate unit firmware version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; One long flash followed by six short flashes = V1.6&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor pre-warn is now 4 chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3D sensor will ONLY be monitored when any reservation mode (installer Feature #11) option is selected&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Horn output (User Feature #5) now defaulted to Human Panic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pit-Stop and Reservation Mode setup required the key to be on for more than 10 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tach Learn (key ON, Brake 5x) will NOT function after RS takeover.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL Step 6 extended from 20 seconds to 60 seconds. More time to get away from the car with a PTS fob. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New Alarm Test Mode:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press &amp;amp; Hold the Valet button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Within 1.5 seconds press lock on the remote. (any arm command, &#039;&#039;ex. OE remote, Telematics Lock/Arm command&#039;&#039;, etc, will work)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Status LED will begin to flash rapidly.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The siren/horn will chirp upon any zone trigger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 Chirp - Sensor Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Chirps - Hood Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:3 Chirps - Door Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:4 Chirps - Pre-warn Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps are thru Horn/Siren ONLY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps will repeat every 2 seconds for the duration of the trigger, meaning, if the alarm detects hood open the siren will chirp 2 times every 2 seconds till the hood is closed.&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple zones are triggered the chirps will alternate between all triggered zones every 2 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press Lock or Unlock or power cycle the alarm to exit Alarm Test Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: There is no anti-nuisance prevention in this mode. Chirps will continue till the zone is cleared, the mode is exited, the alarm is powered down, or the end of time, which ever comes first.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode if operational with or without alarm functions &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode does NOT confirm thru 2-way remotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New VL Process&#039;&#039;&#039;(changes &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underlined&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;pressing the valet button 3x within 5 seconds&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: If needed, press valet button to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Manual&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;: Manual Transmission, Release parking brake, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected (see above). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set the parking brake again, the system will chirp/flash lights to indicate the setting of Installer Feature #11 (Default 2x).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Release and re-set parking brake to select desired MT Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 chirp=MT Mode w/ shut down on door lock from remote, 2 chirps=MT Mode OFF (Default), 3 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down on door close, 4 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down 10 sec after door close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Activate RS and exit the vehicle, the engine will shut down according to the option chosen (when locked, after door closed, or 10 sec after door closed) .&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;60&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; sec. of Step 5, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the brake pedal is pressed before the engine running condition (10 seconds after crank) is met, no settings will be saved and VL must be done again.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Remote Update=&lt;br /&gt;
All 2-way remotes turn off the receiver until an arm confirmation is received to extend battery life.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Any unlock confirmation will turn off receiver in 2-way remotes. This means if you arm CAR 1 than switch to CAR 2 and disarm the receiver in the remote will be off. You will not receive alerts from CAR 1 unless you arm CAR 2 or switch to CAR 1 and do a status update (&amp;quot;P&amp;quot; then Lock). This is normal operation.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative CAR1/CAR2 switching. Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then Unlock to change between CAR1/CAR2. Holding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; and Lock or Unlock will still switch CAR1/CAR2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 3 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 4 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; twice then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 5 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; three times then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New remote firmware identification:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1110 V1.3 = LED flash and chirp upon power up. Long followed by 3 short(s) = v1.3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.2 = New RS tone played upon power up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.3 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the clock will display the firmware version, v1.x.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1511 v1.2 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the lock LED will flash once and the unlock LED will flash twice for v1.2.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current HHU Firmware:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1110 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1510 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1511 - v1.2 (v1.3 in testing)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 5 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 short beep.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Release all buttons within 3 seconds, and then press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 1 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Remove battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold button and insert battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Hold button approx 3 sec.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;*1110 Reset Tip:&#039;&#039; With PCB still in front half of remote case place paper under battery contact. Hold button and remove paper to easily perform reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Antenna Update=&lt;br /&gt;
REC-2N9-3D updated with new IC (11/2019). No operational changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New IC noted by Red dot on tab below 4-pin connector&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=WireSheet-Process-Flow&amp;diff=33</id>
		<title>WireSheet-Process-Flow</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=WireSheet-Process-Flow&amp;diff=33"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:12:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* Step 3: Image Creation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Step 1: Select A Vehicle From The Images To-do List=&lt;br /&gt;
CLICK HERE to view the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CLICK HERE to view guidelines on editing the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select vehicle from WireSheet.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create folder.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Folder naming convention should follow (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move folder to _01_In-Progress.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Step 2: Create Vehicle Profile=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Fill out Vehicle Profile Sheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create folder for each image.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image folder naming convention should follow (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR)_(WIRE).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Use the [[Wire Function Short Codes]] sheet for wire codes. If there are any wires in an image without a code, consult the group so we can assign a code and up date this guide. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• The KEY-TYPE is either PTS (push-to-start) or SK (standard key).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create Word Document.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Gather photos in Word Document. If we don’t have access to that car, use ProDemand.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Word Document consists of images and any notes necessary.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Every WIRE image gets its own folder.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;g.&#039;&#039;&#039; Save Word Document in (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR)_(WIRE) folder.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;h.&#039;&#039;&#039; Document naming convention should be dash delimited with an underscore between vehicle info and wire info. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;i.e.&#039;&#039;&#039; toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1.doc &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move to _02_Info-Ready and initial Vehicle Profile Sheet when complete.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;j.&#039;&#039;&#039;  Either Mike, Shawn, or Betts will survey the Vehicle Profile Sheet and Word Document and if approve, they will initial Vehicle Profile Sheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Step 3: Image Creation=&lt;br /&gt;
​&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; This step can only begin if file is housed in _02_Info-Ready and have initials from tech AND manager.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Initial in Vehicle Profile Sheet&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Obey priority list. Acknowledge highest priority and readiness.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image naming convention should be dash delimited with an underscore between vehicle info and wire info and the file should be in jpg format optimized for web/print. The filename needs to be all lower case so it&#039;s web friendly. For example, an image could end up with the filename: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;i.e.&#039;&#039;&#039; toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1.jpg &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Add additional wires to the end of extension (toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1-st1-acc1.jpg)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; JPGs will be created and add a Omega-Voxx watermark to all images in addition to any existing water marks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Web should be at 72dpi, Print is best at 144dpi.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Original tech, from Step 1, must approve image before being moved to _03_Image-Done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Step 4: Upload To The Server=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Upload to server.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move to _04_Published-To-DB.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Step 5: Enter Image Name Into Database=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Put exact image file name under each column matching each vehicle. Enter into Spreadsheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039;The names will need to be entered into the &#039;wiresheet_vehicle_pics_20180212.xls&#039; sheet so we can convert and import into the main database.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wire_Function_Short_Codes&amp;diff=32</id>
		<title>Wire Function Short Codes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wire_Function_Short_Codes&amp;diff=32"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:11:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:250px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Wire Function&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Code&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #1&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #2&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #3&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| All Door Trigger &lt;br /&gt;
| ADT&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Brake Light&lt;br /&gt;
| BL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  CAN HI&lt;br /&gt;
| CANH&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  CAN LO&lt;br /&gt;
| CANL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clutch Bypass &lt;br /&gt;
| CLBP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Constant 12v&lt;br /&gt;
| CP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Door Lock&lt;br /&gt;
| ADL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Door Unlock &lt;br /&gt;
| ADU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| DFDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| DFWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| DFWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Rear Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| DRDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Rear Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| DRWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Driver Rear Window UP&lt;br /&gt;
| DRWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Full Tach &lt;br /&gt;
| TACH&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Headlights &lt;br /&gt;
| HL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ign. Coil (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| IGC&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #1 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #2 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #3 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Immo. Data &lt;br /&gt;
| IMD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Injector (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| INJ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Keysense &lt;br /&gt;
| KS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Front (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| DFSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Front (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| DFSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Rear (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| DRSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Rear (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| DRSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Motor All Unlock&lt;br /&gt;
| ADUM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Motor Driver Unlock &lt;br /&gt;
| DDUM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Moter Lock &lt;br /&gt;
| ADLM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Neutral Safety  &lt;br /&gt;
| NS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Alarm Arm &lt;br /&gt;
| OEMA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Amp Turn On &lt;br /&gt;
| OEATO&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Disarm &lt;br /&gt;
| OEMD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Hood Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| HP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Horn &lt;br /&gt;
| HRN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OWN Keyless Module &lt;br /&gt;
| RKM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Trunk Rel. Disarm &lt;br /&gt;
| OETR&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Park Brake &lt;br /&gt;
| PB&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Parking Light (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| PLN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Parking Lgiht (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| PLP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Window DOWN  &lt;br /&gt;
| PFWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| PFWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| PRWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| REWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| PFDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| PRDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Antenna  &lt;br /&gt;
| PANT&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Sliding Door Left &lt;br /&gt;
| PSDL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Sliding Door Right &lt;br /&gt;
| PSDR&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Radio ACC. +12V&lt;br /&gt;
| RACCP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Constant +12V &lt;br /&gt;
| RCP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Dimmer &lt;br /&gt;
| RDIM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Ground &lt;br /&gt;
| RCG&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Illumination &lt;br /&gt;
| RILL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Rear Defrost &lt;br /&gt;
| RD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Light &lt;br /&gt;
| RL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Front (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| PFSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Front (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| PFSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Rear (-)&lt;br /&gt;
| PRSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Right Rear (+)&lt;br /&gt;
| PRSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Speed Sense  &lt;br /&gt;
| SS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Start #1 &lt;br /&gt;
| ST1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Starter #2 &lt;br /&gt;
| ST2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| SW DATA &lt;br /&gt;
| SWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Trunk Release  &lt;br /&gt;
| TREL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Trunk/Hatch Trigger &lt;br /&gt;
| THT&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wiresheet&amp;diff=31</id>
		<title>Wiresheet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wiresheet&amp;diff=31"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:10:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* Wire Colors */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=1 - Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
When entering vehicle information, there are a few basic formatting rules that help to keep the information consistent throughout our database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Formatting==&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; All colors need to be listed in full caps in both the wiring section and the notes section. Location information is in full caps but only in the wiring section.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Asterisks must be used in increments of one(and starting at one) from top to bottom when indicating notes. If more than one asterisk indication is made on the same line, they must be used in increments of one from left to right. Make sure to use the correct number of asterisks and do not duplicate asterisks in the tech notes section.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Note numbers must be led by a &amp;quot;#&amp;quot; sign. In the notes section, note numbers must be followed by a hyphen and a space. The should then be followed by See &#039;&#039;title of diagram&#039;&#039; Diagram.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; When entering information, avoid using slang terms like &amp;quot;hook up&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;stick to&amp;quot;, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Polarity==&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:650px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(-)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Pulse Wire&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Pulse Wire&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(-) &amp;gt; (+)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Rest at Ground&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+) &amp;gt; (-)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Rest at Positive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(- MUX)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Multiplex (Ground thru resistor value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+ MUX)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Multiplex (Positive Voltage thru resistor value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(- N.C.)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Normally Closed (Ground at rest and opens when triggered)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+ N.C.)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Normally Closed (Positive Voltage at rest and opens when triggered)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Colors==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Violet&#039;&#039;&#039; in place of Purple&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DK&#039;&#039;&#039; for Dark&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LT&#039;&#039;&#039; for Light&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Striped Wires are separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;Forward Slash ( / )&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dots are separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;Forward Slash ( / ) Dots&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: Red/Black/Silver Dots = &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Red&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; wire with a &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Black&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; strip and &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Silver Dots&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
When connector information is listed in the location field it should be formatted as follows;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wire location\connector color\connector total pins (connector abbreviated to CONN)\comma\wire pin location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;IGNITION SWITCH WHITE 6 PIN CONN, PIN 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wiresheet&amp;diff=30</id>
		<title>Wiresheet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wiresheet&amp;diff=30"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:08:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* Formatting */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=1 - Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
When entering vehicle information, there are a few basic formatting rules that help to keep the information consistent throughout our database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Formatting==&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; All colors need to be listed in full caps in both the wiring section and the notes section. Location information is in full caps but only in the wiring section.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Asterisks must be used in increments of one(and starting at one) from top to bottom when indicating notes. If more than one asterisk indication is made on the same line, they must be used in increments of one from left to right. Make sure to use the correct number of asterisks and do not duplicate asterisks in the tech notes section.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Note numbers must be led by a &amp;quot;#&amp;quot; sign. In the notes section, note numbers must be followed by a hyphen and a space. The should then be followed by See &#039;&#039;title of diagram&#039;&#039; Diagram.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; When entering information, avoid using slang terms like &amp;quot;hook up&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;stick to&amp;quot;, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Polarity==&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:650px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(-)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Pulse Wire&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Pulse Wire&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(-) &amp;gt; (+)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Rest at Ground&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+) &amp;gt; (-)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Rest at Positive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(- MUX)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Multiplex (Ground thru resistor value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+ MUX)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Multiplex (Positive Voltage thru resistor value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(- N.C.)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Normally Closed (Ground at rest and opens when triggered)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+ N.C.)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Normally Closed (Positive Voltage at rest and opens when triggered)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Colors==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Violet&#039;&#039;&#039; in place of Purple&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DK&#039;&#039;&#039; for Dark&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LT&#039;&#039;&#039; for Light&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Striped Wires are separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;Forward Slash ( / )&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dots are separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;Forward Slash ( / ) Dots&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: Red/Black/Silver Dots = __Red__ wire with a __Black__ strip and __Silver Dots__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
When connector information is listed in the location field it should be formatted as follows;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wire location\connector color\connector total pins (connector abbreviated to CONN)\comma\wire pin location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;IGNITION SWITCH WHITE 6 PIN CONN, PIN 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wiresheet&amp;diff=29</id>
		<title>Wiresheet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wiresheet&amp;diff=29"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:08:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* Formatting */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=1 - Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
When entering vehicle information, there are a few basic formatting rules that help to keep the information consistent throughout our database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Formatting==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; All colors need to be listed in full caps in both the wiring section and the notes section. Location information is in full caps but only in the wiring section.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Asterisks must be used in increments of one(and starting at one) from top to bottom when indicating notes. If more than one asterisk indication is made on the same line, they must be used in increments of one from left to right. Make sure to use the correct number of asterisks and do not duplicate asterisks in the tech notes section.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Note numbers must be led by a &amp;quot;#&amp;quot; sign. In the notes section, note numbers must be followed by a hyphen and a space. The should then be followed by See &#039;&#039;title of diagram&#039;&#039; Diagram.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; When entering information, avoid using slang terms like &amp;quot;hook up&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;stick to&amp;quot;, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Polarity==&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:650px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(-)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Pulse Wire&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Pulse Wire&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(-) &amp;gt; (+)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Rest at Ground&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+) &amp;gt; (-)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Rest at Positive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(- MUX)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Multiplex (Ground thru resistor value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+ MUX)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Multiplex (Positive Voltage thru resistor value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(- N.C.)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Normally Closed (Ground at rest and opens when triggered)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+ N.C.)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Normally Closed (Positive Voltage at rest and opens when triggered)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Colors==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Violet&#039;&#039;&#039; in place of Purple&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DK&#039;&#039;&#039; for Dark&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LT&#039;&#039;&#039; for Light&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Striped Wires are separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;Forward Slash ( / )&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dots are separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;Forward Slash ( / ) Dots&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: Red/Black/Silver Dots = __Red__ wire with a __Black__ strip and __Silver Dots__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
When connector information is listed in the location field it should be formatted as follows;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wire location\connector color\connector total pins (connector abbreviated to CONN)\comma\wire pin location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;IGNITION SWITCH WHITE 6 PIN CONN, PIN 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=WireSheet-Process-Flow&amp;diff=28</id>
		<title>WireSheet-Process-Flow</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=WireSheet-Process-Flow&amp;diff=28"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:05:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Step 1: Select A Vehicle From The Images To-do List=&lt;br /&gt;
CLICK HERE to view the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CLICK HERE to view guidelines on editing the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select vehicle from WireSheet.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create folder.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Folder naming convention should follow (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move folder to _01_In-Progress.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Step 2: Create Vehicle Profile=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Fill out Vehicle Profile Sheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create folder for each image.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image folder naming convention should follow (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR)_(WIRE).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Use the [[Wire Function Short Codes]] sheet for wire codes. If there are any wires in an image without a code, consult the group so we can assign a code and up date this guide. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• The KEY-TYPE is either PTS (push-to-start) or SK (standard key).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create Word Document.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Gather photos in Word Document. If we don’t have access to that car, use ProDemand.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Word Document consists of images and any notes necessary.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Every WIRE image gets its own folder.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;g.&#039;&#039;&#039; Save Word Document in (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR)_(WIRE) folder.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;h.&#039;&#039;&#039; Document naming convention should be dash delimited with an underscore between vehicle info and wire info. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;i.e.&#039;&#039;&#039; toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1.doc &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move to _02_Info-Ready and initial Vehicle Profile Sheet when complete.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;j.&#039;&#039;&#039;  Either Mike, Shawn, or Betts will survey the Vehicle Profile Sheet and Word Document and if approve, they will initial Vehicle Profile Sheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Step 3: Image Creation=&lt;br /&gt;
​&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; This step can only begin if file is housed in _02_Info-Ready and have initials from tech AND manager.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Initial in Vehicle Profile Sheet&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Obey priority list. Acknowledge highest priority and readiness.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image naming convention should be dash delimited with an underscore between vehicle info and wire info and the file should be in jpg format optimized for web/print. The filename needs to be all lower case so it&#039;s web friendly. For example, an image could end up with the filename: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;i.e.&#039;&#039;&#039; toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1.jpg &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Add additional wires to the end of extension (toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1-st1-acc1.jpg)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; JPGs will be created and add a Omega-Voxx watermark to all images in addition to any existing water marks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Web should be at 72DPI, Print is best at 144dpi.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Original tech, from Step 1, must approve image before being moved to _03_Image-Done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Step 4: Upload To The Server=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Upload to server.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move to _04_Published-To-DB.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Step 5: Enter Image Name Into Database=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Put exact image file name under each column matching each vehicle. Enter into Spreadsheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039;The names will need to be entered into the &#039;wiresheet_vehicle_pics_20180212.xls&#039; sheet so we can convert and import into the main database.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=27</id>
		<title>Linkr-M1</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=27"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:03:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* 2 - Linkr App Notes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(((&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following information at your own risk. No written or expressed warranty or liability. You break it, You bought it&lt;br /&gt;
)))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=1 - Linkr Testing, Activation, &amp;amp; Troubleshooting=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==1.1 - Initial Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at omegadealer.com from PC or Smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Log in to [http://www.omegadealer.com/ OmegaDealer] and click the &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Test Activation&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Activation can take anywhere from 3 to 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the unit is powered before activation the installer &#039;&#039;&#039;MUST&#039;&#039;&#039; power cycle the unit before activation will complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The unit will stay active for 72 hours or until installer finishes test process&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If 72 hour testing window expires see &#039;&#039;1.2 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; add any number to the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should use the Device name, Device mobile number, &amp;amp; Configuration code only&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Adding a number to the Alert Receiver Primary field will set the device in user mode and make it difficult for the real end user to operate the device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Testing functions can be done from within the app on any phone via SMS messages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; SMS command &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;w/o Alert Receiver Primary set&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039; = Lock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039;&#039; = Unlock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039; = Trunk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;4&#039;&#039;&#039; = Start&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039; = Engine Disable&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;6&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 1&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;8&#039;&#039;&#039; = Locate&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; In data mode, Locate does not require data confirmation from the host system. Use this command to verify Linkr connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Confirmations &amp;amp; ALERTS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; All confirmations will be sent to the phone number that send the test command&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Alerts will be sent to the last number a command was received from&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; It is recommended that installers test alarm alerts, especially in hardwired installations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;7.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once installation testing is complete the installer will enter the Configuration Code and Customer&#039;s Email into Linkr Test Activation webpage&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The test activation will be suspended until the customer purchases there subscription of choice on caralarm.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer will be emailed there device phone number and configuration code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.2 - User Subscription Activations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Over the phone (Customer Service or Tech Support) - NONE&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at www.caralarm.com via PC or the user&#039;s smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Register&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUPPORT -&amp;gt; Activate Your Linkr&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Follow onscreen instructions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number will be available in the customers Linkr Subscription page once the activation is complete &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.3 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Dealer needs to test but the 72 hr test window expired.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Installer must call back when he has the vehicle and is ready to test.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login at omegadealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Management&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Search for the device by MEID or its mobile number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unsuspend the device &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Tell the installer to wait 5-10 minutes for the transaction to finish before trying to test again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer will need to go to &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Activation Progress&#039; and click &#039;Finish&#039; to get the device number &amp;amp; config code (if needed) and complete setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.4 - Deactivations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;DO NOT DEACTIVATE WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Each device must stay activated for 24 months to meet Verizon requirements&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the user does not renew after the 1st year (or cancels early), we will ‘park’ the line (phone number) on a different plan and recycle the line into new activations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the line has been recycled to a different device the original unit is &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; and will not re-register with the network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Any &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; device MUST be sent to Warranty/Repair before being able to register with the network and get a new number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.5 - Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1. Status Lights &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Power – Red &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Constant&#039;&#039;&#039; - 12V power connected &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - 12V power connected &amp;amp; charging internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - 12V power disconnected &amp;amp; device is powered by internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iv.&#039;&#039;&#039; Off - 12V power disconnected (unit can still be powered by internal backup battery) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; GPS – Blue &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - Searching for GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - GPS data error &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; - GPS off (GPS will turn off after ~25 seconds of no motion &amp;amp; no ignition signal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cellular – Green &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - Transmitting on cellular network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash (less than 1 second off) - Searching for cellular signal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Slow Flash&#039;&#039;&#039; (greater than 1 second off) - Connected to cellular network &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Using status light to test ignition &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; With device in secure location and status light visible wait till GPS status light (Blue) turns off &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Without moving the device turn the vehicles ignition On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device detects ignition via data or the Yellow wire the GPS status light (Blue) should turn On or begin to flash &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2. Unit does not respond to any commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check MEID status in OmegaDealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Report&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter MEID or Device Number in respective field then click &#039;Search&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Suspended, the installer clicked &#039;Finish&#039; in the activation screen or exceeded the 72 hour test window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; See  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;for re-activation steps&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Default the installer did not activate that MEID number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify correct MEID and compare to device phone number being used&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Find incorrectly activated device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Active the device is online&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is In Progress the activation process has begun but is not complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Be patient, this could take 3 - 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check device settings and be sure there is no number listed in the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; If a number has EVER been listed in that field installer will need to perform the Device Reset and resend the settings&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn the ignition key On and Off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Timing is important, it needs to be slower than most programming processes. The key should be On for approximately 1/2 seconds every time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; After the 5th key cycle to Off re-send the correct device setting&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for confirmation text message on installer’s phone, approximately 1 - 3 Minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3. Unit responds commands but the host system does not Lock/Unlock/Start.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default Configuration Code is 001009, all analog outputs. Be sure settings update was sent AND responded to.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol. VerXX of the Linkr-M1 firmware sends blind confirmation, meaning the response is confirmation of message sent and not action performed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4. Unit only responds to settings updates and GPS commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; If Blade is used be sure firmware support telematics gateway&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; To test this remove Blade and send commands from Linkr. Door locks may not work as the Blade may be needed but the alarm should respond with arm/disarm light flash and chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5. Unit does not send alarm alert.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Valet Status&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Send the Valet command from the app and confirm confirmation messsage is &amp;quot;Valet Mode OFF&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.6 - Changing Config Code==&lt;br /&gt;
1. After the system settings have been sent with primary alert receiver set the config code is locked &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. To change the config code the app needs to temporarily be placed back into installer mode (remove primary alert receiver) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol next to config code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the config code wizard to make the desired changes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Apply new configuration code&amp;quot; button &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the screen returns to the setting page ensure all alert receivers are correct then select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release no longer locks the config code when the primary alert receiver set.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.7 - Returning to Installer Mode==&lt;br /&gt;
1. If the phone being used  &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the phone number being used as primary alert receiver &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Continue with #2 below&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. If the phone being used &#039;&#039;&#039;IS&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The device is now back in installer mode &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release will not allow you to switch from Installer Mode to User Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are in Installer Mode you must delete the device and reinstall it in the app to return to User Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.8 - Unit Swap==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; DO NOT SWAP UNITS WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done on ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Troubleshoot before swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check LED&#039;s for power and connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify device phone number by looking up MEID in the OmegaDealer or ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Perform alert receiver synchronize&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Talk to manager to confirm conclusion&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unit swap can only be performed by management (Shawn or Mike) at this time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; Information needed for unit swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Picture of both devices showing the MEID label clearly&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Instructions &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login to ORBCOMM Portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUBSCRIBER -&amp;gt; SWAP&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter old &amp;amp; new MEID - VERIFY 38 times - DO NOT GET IT WRONG&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Swap can ONLY be done with new MEID that has not been activated. Be sure replacement unit is NOT configured in OrbComm&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.9 - iMessage De-Register==&lt;br /&gt;
If messages from an iPhone to the Linkr are being send as iMessage (Blue) and not SMS messages (Green) we will need to de-register the number with apple.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Configure the device with Pass-thru Messages turned On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039;To send the message as an SMS the user can temporaraly disable iMessage on the phone in Settings &amp;gt; Messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the device phone number in the Apple website, [https://selfsolve.apple.com/deregister-imessage/ HERE], then click Send Code.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer should receive a forwarded message with a confirmation code to enter into the second step.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be added&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
=2 - Linkr App Notes=&lt;br /&gt;
Android app V2.67.00(30)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
www.caralarm.com/linkr/Android/Linkr_v2-67-30.apk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internal Data&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OrbComm Service Plan Reference&lt;br /&gt;
{|  border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;  cellpadding=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|----&lt;br /&gt;
|Omega Plan&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ plan&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lite 100&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ200&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Std 350&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ500S&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Plus 500&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ450&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Max 1000&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ710&lt;br /&gt;
|----&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=26</id>
		<title>Linkr-M1</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=26"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T16:00:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* 2 - Linkr App Notes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(((&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following information at your own risk. No written or expressed warranty or liability. You break it, You bought it&lt;br /&gt;
)))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=1 - Linkr Testing, Activation, &amp;amp; Troubleshooting=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==1.1 - Initial Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at omegadealer.com from PC or Smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Log in to [http://www.omegadealer.com/ OmegaDealer] and click the &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Test Activation&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Activation can take anywhere from 3 to 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the unit is powered before activation the installer &#039;&#039;&#039;MUST&#039;&#039;&#039; power cycle the unit before activation will complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The unit will stay active for 72 hours or until installer finishes test process&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If 72 hour testing window expires see &#039;&#039;1.2 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; add any number to the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should use the Device name, Device mobile number, &amp;amp; Configuration code only&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Adding a number to the Alert Receiver Primary field will set the device in user mode and make it difficult for the real end user to operate the device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Testing functions can be done from within the app on any phone via SMS messages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; SMS command &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;w/o Alert Receiver Primary set&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039; = Lock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039;&#039; = Unlock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039; = Trunk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;4&#039;&#039;&#039; = Start&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039; = Engine Disable&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;6&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 1&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;8&#039;&#039;&#039; = Locate&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; In data mode, Locate does not require data confirmation from the host system. Use this command to verify Linkr connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Confirmations &amp;amp; ALERTS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; All confirmations will be sent to the phone number that send the test command&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Alerts will be sent to the last number a command was received from&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; It is recommended that installers test alarm alerts, especially in hardwired installations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;7.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once installation testing is complete the installer will enter the Configuration Code and Customer&#039;s Email into Linkr Test Activation webpage&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The test activation will be suspended until the customer purchases there subscription of choice on caralarm.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer will be emailed there device phone number and configuration code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.2 - User Subscription Activations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Over the phone (Customer Service or Tech Support) - NONE&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at www.caralarm.com via PC or the user&#039;s smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Register&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUPPORT -&amp;gt; Activate Your Linkr&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Follow onscreen instructions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number will be available in the customers Linkr Subscription page once the activation is complete &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.3 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Dealer needs to test but the 72 hr test window expired.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Installer must call back when he has the vehicle and is ready to test.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login at omegadealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Management&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Search for the device by MEID or its mobile number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unsuspend the device &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Tell the installer to wait 5-10 minutes for the transaction to finish before trying to test again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer will need to go to &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Activation Progress&#039; and click &#039;Finish&#039; to get the device number &amp;amp; config code (if needed) and complete setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.4 - Deactivations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;DO NOT DEACTIVATE WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Each device must stay activated for 24 months to meet Verizon requirements&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the user does not renew after the 1st year (or cancels early), we will ‘park’ the line (phone number) on a different plan and recycle the line into new activations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the line has been recycled to a different device the original unit is &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; and will not re-register with the network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Any &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; device MUST be sent to Warranty/Repair before being able to register with the network and get a new number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.5 - Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1. Status Lights &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Power – Red &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Constant&#039;&#039;&#039; - 12V power connected &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - 12V power connected &amp;amp; charging internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - 12V power disconnected &amp;amp; device is powered by internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iv.&#039;&#039;&#039; Off - 12V power disconnected (unit can still be powered by internal backup battery) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; GPS – Blue &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - Searching for GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - GPS data error &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; - GPS off (GPS will turn off after ~25 seconds of no motion &amp;amp; no ignition signal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cellular – Green &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - Transmitting on cellular network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash (less than 1 second off) - Searching for cellular signal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Slow Flash&#039;&#039;&#039; (greater than 1 second off) - Connected to cellular network &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Using status light to test ignition &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; With device in secure location and status light visible wait till GPS status light (Blue) turns off &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Without moving the device turn the vehicles ignition On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device detects ignition via data or the Yellow wire the GPS status light (Blue) should turn On or begin to flash &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2. Unit does not respond to any commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check MEID status in OmegaDealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Report&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter MEID or Device Number in respective field then click &#039;Search&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Suspended, the installer clicked &#039;Finish&#039; in the activation screen or exceeded the 72 hour test window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; See  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;for re-activation steps&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Default the installer did not activate that MEID number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify correct MEID and compare to device phone number being used&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Find incorrectly activated device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Active the device is online&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is In Progress the activation process has begun but is not complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Be patient, this could take 3 - 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check device settings and be sure there is no number listed in the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; If a number has EVER been listed in that field installer will need to perform the Device Reset and resend the settings&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn the ignition key On and Off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Timing is important, it needs to be slower than most programming processes. The key should be On for approximately 1/2 seconds every time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; After the 5th key cycle to Off re-send the correct device setting&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for confirmation text message on installer’s phone, approximately 1 - 3 Minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3. Unit responds commands but the host system does not Lock/Unlock/Start.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default Configuration Code is 001009, all analog outputs. Be sure settings update was sent AND responded to.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol. VerXX of the Linkr-M1 firmware sends blind confirmation, meaning the response is confirmation of message sent and not action performed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4. Unit only responds to settings updates and GPS commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; If Blade is used be sure firmware support telematics gateway&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; To test this remove Blade and send commands from Linkr. Door locks may not work as the Blade may be needed but the alarm should respond with arm/disarm light flash and chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5. Unit does not send alarm alert.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Valet Status&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Send the Valet command from the app and confirm confirmation messsage is &amp;quot;Valet Mode OFF&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.6 - Changing Config Code==&lt;br /&gt;
1. After the system settings have been sent with primary alert receiver set the config code is locked &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. To change the config code the app needs to temporarily be placed back into installer mode (remove primary alert receiver) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol next to config code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the config code wizard to make the desired changes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Apply new configuration code&amp;quot; button &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the screen returns to the setting page ensure all alert receivers are correct then select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release no longer locks the config code when the primary alert receiver set.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.7 - Returning to Installer Mode==&lt;br /&gt;
1. If the phone being used  &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the phone number being used as primary alert receiver &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Continue with #2 below&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. If the phone being used &#039;&#039;&#039;IS&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The device is now back in installer mode &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release will not allow you to switch from Installer Mode to User Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are in Installer Mode you must delete the device and reinstall it in the app to return to User Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.8 - Unit Swap==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; DO NOT SWAP UNITS WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done on ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Troubleshoot before swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check LED&#039;s for power and connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify device phone number by looking up MEID in the OmegaDealer or ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Perform alert receiver synchronize&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Talk to manager to confirm conclusion&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unit swap can only be performed by management (Shawn or Mike) at this time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; Information needed for unit swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Picture of both devices showing the MEID label clearly&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Instructions &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login to ORBCOMM Portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUBSCRIBER -&amp;gt; SWAP&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter old &amp;amp; new MEID - VERIFY 38 times - DO NOT GET IT WRONG&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Swap can ONLY be done with new MEID that has not been activated. Be sure replacement unit is NOT configured in OrbComm&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.9 - iMessage De-Register==&lt;br /&gt;
If messages from an iPhone to the Linkr are being send as iMessage (Blue) and not SMS messages (Green) we will need to de-register the number with apple.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Configure the device with Pass-thru Messages turned On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039;To send the message as an SMS the user can temporaraly disable iMessage on the phone in Settings &amp;gt; Messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the device phone number in the Apple website, [https://selfsolve.apple.com/deregister-imessage/ HERE], then click Send Code.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer should receive a forwarded message with a confirmation code to enter into the second step.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be added&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
=2 - Linkr App Notes=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Android app V2.67.00(30)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
www.caralarm.com/linkr/Android/Linkr_v2-67-30.apk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internal Data&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OrbComm Service Plan Reference&lt;br /&gt;
{|  border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;  cellpadding=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|----&lt;br /&gt;
|Omega Plan&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ plan&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Lite 100&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ200&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Std 350&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ500S&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Plus 500&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ450&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Max 1000&lt;br /&gt;
|VZ710&lt;br /&gt;
|----&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=25</id>
		<title>Linkr-M1</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=25"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T15:16:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(((&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following information at your own risk. No written or expressed warranty or liability. You break it, You bought it&lt;br /&gt;
)))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=1 - Linkr Testing, Activation, &amp;amp; Troubleshooting=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==1.1 - Initial Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at omegadealer.com from PC or Smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Log in to [http://www.omegadealer.com/ OmegaDealer] and click the &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Test Activation&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Activation can take anywhere from 3 to 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the unit is powered before activation the installer &#039;&#039;&#039;MUST&#039;&#039;&#039; power cycle the unit before activation will complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The unit will stay active for 72 hours or until installer finishes test process&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If 72 hour testing window expires see &#039;&#039;1.2 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; add any number to the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should use the Device name, Device mobile number, &amp;amp; Configuration code only&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Adding a number to the Alert Receiver Primary field will set the device in user mode and make it difficult for the real end user to operate the device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Testing functions can be done from within the app on any phone via SMS messages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; SMS command &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;w/o Alert Receiver Primary set&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039; = Lock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039;&#039; = Unlock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039; = Trunk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;4&#039;&#039;&#039; = Start&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039; = Engine Disable&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;6&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 1&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;8&#039;&#039;&#039; = Locate&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; In data mode, Locate does not require data confirmation from the host system. Use this command to verify Linkr connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Confirmations &amp;amp; ALERTS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; All confirmations will be sent to the phone number that send the test command&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Alerts will be sent to the last number a command was received from&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; It is recommended that installers test alarm alerts, especially in hardwired installations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;7.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once installation testing is complete the installer will enter the Configuration Code and Customer&#039;s Email into Linkr Test Activation webpage&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The test activation will be suspended until the customer purchases there subscription of choice on caralarm.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer will be emailed there device phone number and configuration code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.2 - User Subscription Activations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Over the phone (Customer Service or Tech Support) - NONE&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at www.caralarm.com via PC or the user&#039;s smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Register&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUPPORT -&amp;gt; Activate Your Linkr&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Follow onscreen instructions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number will be available in the customers Linkr Subscription page once the activation is complete &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.3 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Dealer needs to test but the 72 hr test window expired.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Installer must call back when he has the vehicle and is ready to test.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login at omegadealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Management&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Search for the device by MEID or its mobile number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unsuspend the device &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Tell the installer to wait 5-10 minutes for the transaction to finish before trying to test again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer will need to go to &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Activation Progress&#039; and click &#039;Finish&#039; to get the device number &amp;amp; config code (if needed) and complete setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.4 - Deactivations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;DO NOT DEACTIVATE WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Each device must stay activated for 24 months to meet Verizon requirements&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the user does not renew after the 1st year (or cancels early), we will ‘park’ the line (phone number) on a different plan and recycle the line into new activations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the line has been recycled to a different device the original unit is &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; and will not re-register with the network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Any &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; device MUST be sent to Warranty/Repair before being able to register with the network and get a new number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.5 - Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1. Status Lights &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Power – Red &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Constant&#039;&#039;&#039; - 12V power connected &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - 12V power connected &amp;amp; charging internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - 12V power disconnected &amp;amp; device is powered by internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iv.&#039;&#039;&#039; Off - 12V power disconnected (unit can still be powered by internal backup battery) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; GPS – Blue &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - Searching for GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - GPS data error &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; - GPS off (GPS will turn off after ~25 seconds of no motion &amp;amp; no ignition signal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cellular – Green &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - Transmitting on cellular network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash (less than 1 second off) - Searching for cellular signal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Slow Flash&#039;&#039;&#039; (greater than 1 second off) - Connected to cellular network &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Using status light to test ignition &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; With device in secure location and status light visible wait till GPS status light (Blue) turns off &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Without moving the device turn the vehicles ignition On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device detects ignition via data or the Yellow wire the GPS status light (Blue) should turn On or begin to flash &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2. Unit does not respond to any commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check MEID status in OmegaDealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Report&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter MEID or Device Number in respective field then click &#039;Search&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Suspended, the installer clicked &#039;Finish&#039; in the activation screen or exceeded the 72 hour test window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; See  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;for re-activation steps&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Default the installer did not activate that MEID number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify correct MEID and compare to device phone number being used&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Find incorrectly activated device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Active the device is online&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is In Progress the activation process has begun but is not complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Be patient, this could take 3 - 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check device settings and be sure there is no number listed in the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; If a number has EVER been listed in that field installer will need to perform the Device Reset and resend the settings&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn the ignition key On and Off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Timing is important, it needs to be slower than most programming processes. The key should be On for approximately 1/2 seconds every time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; After the 5th key cycle to Off re-send the correct device setting&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for confirmation text message on installer’s phone, approximately 1 - 3 Minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3. Unit responds commands but the host system does not Lock/Unlock/Start.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default Configuration Code is 001009, all analog outputs. Be sure settings update was sent AND responded to.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol. VerXX of the Linkr-M1 firmware sends blind confirmation, meaning the response is confirmation of message sent and not action performed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4. Unit only responds to settings updates and GPS commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; If Blade is used be sure firmware support telematics gateway&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; To test this remove Blade and send commands from Linkr. Door locks may not work as the Blade may be needed but the alarm should respond with arm/disarm light flash and chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5. Unit does not send alarm alert.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Valet Status&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Send the Valet command from the app and confirm confirmation messsage is &amp;quot;Valet Mode OFF&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.6 - Changing Config Code==&lt;br /&gt;
1. After the system settings have been sent with primary alert receiver set the config code is locked &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. To change the config code the app needs to temporarily be placed back into installer mode (remove primary alert receiver) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol next to config code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the config code wizard to make the desired changes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Apply new configuration code&amp;quot; button &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the screen returns to the setting page ensure all alert receivers are correct then select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release no longer locks the config code when the primary alert receiver set.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.7 - Returning to Installer Mode==&lt;br /&gt;
1. If the phone being used  &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the phone number being used as primary alert receiver &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Continue with #2 below&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. If the phone being used &#039;&#039;&#039;IS&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The device is now back in installer mode &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release will not allow you to switch from Installer Mode to User Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are in Installer Mode you must delete the device and reinstall it in the app to return to User Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.8 - Unit Swap==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; DO NOT SWAP UNITS WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done on ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Troubleshoot before swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check LED&#039;s for power and connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify device phone number by looking up MEID in the OmegaDealer or ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Perform alert receiver synchronize&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Talk to manager to confirm conclusion&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unit swap can only be performed by management (Shawn or Mike) at this time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; Information needed for unit swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Picture of both devices showing the MEID label clearly&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Instructions &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login to ORBCOMM Portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUBSCRIBER -&amp;gt; SWAP&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter old &amp;amp; new MEID - VERIFY 38 times - DO NOT GET IT WRONG&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Swap can ONLY be done with new MEID that has not been activated. Be sure replacement unit is NOT configured in OrbComm&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.9 - iMessage De-Register==&lt;br /&gt;
If messages from an iPhone to the Linkr are being send as iMessage (Blue) and not SMS messages (Green) we will need to de-register the number with apple.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Configure the device with Pass-thru Messages turned On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039;To send the message as an SMS the user can temporaraly disable iMessage on the phone in Settings &amp;gt; Messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the device phone number in the Apple website, [https://selfsolve.apple.com/deregister-imessage/ HERE], then click Send Code.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer should receive a forwarded message with a confirmation code to enter into the second step.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be added&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
=2 - Linkr App Notes=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Android app V2.67.00(30)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
www.caralarm.com/linkr/Android/Linkr_v2-67-30.apk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internal Data&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OrbComm Service Plan Reference&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Omega Plan - VZ plan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lite 100          VZ200&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Std 350          VZ500S&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Plus 500        VZ450&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Max 1000       VZ710&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=24</id>
		<title>70-series</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=24"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T15:09:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* Notes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=New 70 Series Features=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; - Turn the ignition &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;, immediately press the valet button 10 times. After long siren chirp/horn honk press Lock &amp;amp; Unlock together on the remote or press the Brake Pedal 5 times. The system will chirp twice and exit programming with all features set to OEM defaults.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To ignore 3D motion from antenna or sensor disconnect Neutral Safety and perform VL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;V1.6 will ignore 3D motion unless M/T reservation mode (Installer Feature #11) is set to one of the Manual Transmission options.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Vehicle Learn (See V1.6 for new process)=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If needed&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, press valet to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. (&#039;&#039;This step was left out of some early production manuals&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF The system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within 20 sec. of Step 4, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: OPTIONAL: To enable Manual Transmission Reservation mode, set the parking brake. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(The BLACK/WHITE wire must be connected to the parking brake.) System should chirp/flash lights 1x. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 8&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
*With Green/Red and Green/Black not programed as CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 (Feature 10/18) the two way remote will not confirm CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 operation but the data output (Left Sliding Door and Gas Cap) will still operate.(fixed in v1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Installer Feature #20 (Low Current Mode) does not program via WebLink. (Fixed in V1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When using AU-84TDP you must not use Black/White (Neutral Safety) and go thru VL to prevent false 3D status. (fixed in AU-84TDP firmware update)&lt;br /&gt;
*When using data module for door triggers on X70 the Zone Violation Recall will show Hood (2 Flashes) for door trigger. Door triggers report properly from data module with XX70-B. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When connected to I IGN and 2 ACC circuits VL will not learn properly. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Any time updates are done thru WebLink the current feature settings of the unit are maintained. To see new default settings you must power the brain and do a system reset.[http://wiki.uscnetwork.com/index.php?title=70-series 70-series]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.0=&lt;br /&gt;
Available July 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Original Release &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Progressive Voltage - monitor battery voltage (0.3V increase from rest) for 1 min after RS then ignore any voltage change for the remaining RS runtime&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Vehicle Learn process (See Below)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New antennas and remotes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All units have temp sensor included &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can not configure features via OmegaWebLink &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.1=&lt;br /&gt;
Available September 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct Lock operation after takeover &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Blade detection does not operate properly. If Blade flashes Red-Red-Blue-repeat the installer will need to set installer feature #12 to 2nd or 3rd option so Blade port is in iData protocol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.2=&lt;br /&gt;
Available April 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct auto data protocol select when Blade is present &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allow Lock operation during Vehicle Learn for some PTS vehicles &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct analog hood trigger input RS shutdown process in RS-X70 units &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1+1 button remotes will allow Unlock Only when programed with installer feature #13 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.3=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Latch output option for Channel 4&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
High Temp RS feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 programmable temperature settings for Low Temp starting and 4 programmable temperature settings for High Temp&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Low Volt auto start and Low Battery notification for 2-way TX set to 11.5V&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
No delay to 3rd, 4th, and 5th channel operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.4=&lt;br /&gt;
Available February 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
iData protocol updated to support Linkr-LT1 confirmations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.5=&lt;br /&gt;
Available August 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default runtime now 15 minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default protocol set to Black=iData/Green=DBI&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New TX RS activation options (user feature #8). Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 3 seconds (option 5) &amp;amp; Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 4 seconds (option 6).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(4-button &amp;amp; 2-button TX only, 1-button will be set to press 2x when these options are selected)&lt;br /&gt;
Lift gate status via data causing 3 chirps on arm fixed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pulse Ignition On Disarm (installer feature #14) will now pulse the Ignition &amp;amp; Accessory outputs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 2-way confirmation will work when Green/Red &amp;amp; Green/Black are NOT set to CH4 or CH5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Glow Plug State via iData protocol. Start time will be controlled by Glow Plug State when feature is supported by bypass module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
M/T setup (installer feature #11) mode now has 2 new options. Shut down and lock on door close (option 3) &amp;amp; Shut down and lock 10 seconds after door close (option 4)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Tach Learn process:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Start engine with the key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hold Brake pedal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press and release valet button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Entering tach learn will confirm with 5 chirps/light flashes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid tach signal is present system will set Engine Detection to Tach and learn tach&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Release Brake or turn Ignition OFF to exit tach learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Old and New Tach Learn process will switch Engine Detection feature to tach wire and learn valid tach &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid signal is present&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer reports 5 chirps after starting vehicle. New tach learn process can be triggered &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;IF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the customer pulses the brake pedal after starting the car.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.6=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2019&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not recognize 2 ACC circuits - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not setting Engine Detection (Installer Feature #3) or Data Protocol (Installer Feature #12) after update - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware version now indicated by LED upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Seconds after power up the status LED will give long and short flashes to indicate unit firmware version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; One long flash followed by six short flashes = V1.6&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor pre-warn is now 4 chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3D sensor will ONLY be monitored when any reservation mode (installer Feature #11) option is selected&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Horn output (User Feature #5) now defaulted to Human Panic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pit-Stop and Reservation Mode setup required the key to be on for more than 10 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tach Learn (key ON, Brake 5x) will NOT function after RS takeover.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL Step 6 extended from 20 seconds to 60 seconds. More time to get away from the car with a PTS fob. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New Alarm Test Mode:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press &amp;amp; Hold the Valet button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Within 1.5 seconds press lock on the remote. (any arm command, &#039;&#039;ex. OE remote, Telematics Lock/Arm command&#039;&#039;, etc, will work)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Status LED will begin to flash rapidly.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The siren/horn will chirp upon any zone trigger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 Chirp - Sensor Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Chirps - Hood Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:3 Chirps - Door Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:4 Chirps - Pre-warn Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps are thru Horn/Siren ONLY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps will repeat every 2 seconds for the duration of the trigger, meaning, if the alarm detects hood open the siren will chirp 2 times every 2 seconds till the hood is closed.&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple zones are triggered the chirps will alternate between all triggered zones every 2 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press Lock or Unlock or power cycle the alarm to exit Alarm Test Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: There is no anti-nuisance prevention in this mode. Chirps will continue till the zone is cleared, the mode is exited, the alarm is powered down, or the end of time, which ever comes first.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode if operational with or without alarm functions &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode does NOT confirm thru 2-way remotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New VL Process&#039;&#039;&#039;(changes &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underlined&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;pressing the valet button 3x within 5 seconds&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: If needed, press valet button to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Manual&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;: Manual Transmission, Release parking brake, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected (see above). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set the parking brake again, the system will chirp/flash lights to indicate the setting of Installer Feature #11 (Default 2x).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Release and re-set parking brake to select desired MT Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 chirp=MT Mode w/ shut down on door lock from remote, 2 chirps=MT Mode OFF (Default), 3 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down on door close, 4 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down 10 sec after door close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Activate RS and exit the vehicle, the engine will shut down according to the option chosen (when locked, after door closed, or 10 sec after door closed) .&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;60&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; sec. of Step 5, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the brake pedal is pressed before the engine running condition (10 seconds after crank) is met, no settings will be saved and VL must be done again.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Remote Update=&lt;br /&gt;
All 2-way remotes turn off the receiver until an arm confirmation is received to extend battery life.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Any unlock confirmation will turn off receiver in 2-way remotes. This means if you arm CAR 1 than switch to CAR 2 and disarm the receiver in the remote will be off. You will not receive alerts from CAR 1 unless you arm CAR 2 or switch to CAR 1 and do a status update (&amp;quot;P&amp;quot; then Lock). This is normal operation.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative CAR1/CAR2 switching. Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then Unlock to change between CAR1/CAR2. Holding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; and Lock or Unlock will still switch CAR1/CAR2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 3 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 4 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; twice then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 5 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; three times then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New remote firmware identification:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1110 V1.3 = LED flash and chirp upon power up. Long followed by 3 short(s) = v1.3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.2 = New RS tone played upon power up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.3 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the clock will display the firmware version, v1.x.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1511 v1.2 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the lock LED will flash once and the unlock LED will flash twice for v1.2.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current HHU Firmware:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1110 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1510 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1511 - v1.2 (v1.3 in testing)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 5 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 short beep.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Release all buttons within 3 seconds, and then press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 1 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Remove battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold button and insert battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Hold button approx 3 sec.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;*1110 Reset Tip:&#039;&#039; With PCB still in front half of remote case place paper under battery contact. Hold button and remove paper to easily perform reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Antenna Update=&lt;br /&gt;
REC-2N9-3D updated with new IC (11/2019). No operational changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New IC noted by Red dot on tab below 4-pin connector&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=OL-RF-XX-SST&amp;diff=23</id>
		<title>OL-RF-XX-SST</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=OL-RF-XX-SST&amp;diff=23"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T15:05:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
RF antenna using the ADS partner protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Remote data is shared between the RS module and the antenna so remotes MUST be programed upon installation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Remote can NOT be preprogrammed at the time of production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Some features (Passive Lock, Programmable RS activation, LED flashes, etc..) of the other Omega RF kits are not available&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Button operation is slightly different then other Omega product.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Signal is transmitted upon button release. The most noticeable difference is RS activation, two quick presses will activate RS. It is recommended that dealer/installer operate the RS a few times before demo to get familiar with the operation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware updateable via weblink&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Firmware Versions=&lt;br /&gt;
Production Version - V1.02&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Update Version - V1.03&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Correct data bits to display firmware version correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Alternative TX Programming=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;With ADS hardware&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition and antenna button(Listed in guide)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Ignition ON press and release antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hold antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Led in antenna will turn ON&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press lock on each remote to learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; Release antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition 5x:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Ignition OFF-ON  5 times (5th time you need to stay on ignition)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press lock on each remote to learn (5 sec to press lock between each lock)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn OFF ignition&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Unit will most likely end up in valet mode. You will need to cycle the ignition 5x to get out of valet mode&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition and Brake&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Ignition ON/OFF/ON, leave in the ON position&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press and release brake 3 times&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press lock on each remote to learn (5 sec to press lock between each lock)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn ignition OFF&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wire_Function_Short_Codes&amp;diff=22</id>
		<title>Wire Function Short Codes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wire_Function_Short_Codes&amp;diff=22"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T14:59:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;  {| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:500px;&amp;quot; |- | &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Wire Function&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; | &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Code&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; |- | Accessory #1 | ACC1 |- | Accessory #2 | ACC2 |- | Accessory #3...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:500px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Wire Function&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Code&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #1&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #2&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Accessory #3&lt;br /&gt;
| ACC3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| All Door Trigger &lt;br /&gt;
| ADT&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Brake Light&lt;br /&gt;
| BL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  CAN HI&lt;br /&gt;
| CANH&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  CAN LO&lt;br /&gt;
| CANL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Clutch Bypass &lt;br /&gt;
| CLBP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Constant 12v&lt;br /&gt;
| CP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Door Lock&lt;br /&gt;
| ADL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Door Unlock &lt;br /&gt;
| ADU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| DFDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| DFWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Front Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| DFWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Rear Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| DRDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Driver Rear Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| DRWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Driver Rear Window UP&lt;br /&gt;
| DRWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Full Tach &lt;br /&gt;
| TACH&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Headlights &lt;br /&gt;
| HL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ign. Coil (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| IGC&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #1 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #2 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Ignition #3 &lt;br /&gt;
| IG3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Immo. Data &lt;br /&gt;
| IMD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Injector (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| INJ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Keysense &lt;br /&gt;
| KS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Front (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| DFSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Front (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| DFSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Rear (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| DRSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Left Rear (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| DRSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Motor All Unlock&lt;br /&gt;
| ADUM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Motor Driver Unlock &lt;br /&gt;
| DDUM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Moter Lock &lt;br /&gt;
| ADLM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Neutral Safety  &lt;br /&gt;
| NS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Alarm Arm &lt;br /&gt;
| OEMA&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Amp Turn On &lt;br /&gt;
| OEATO&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Disarm &lt;br /&gt;
| OEMD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Hood Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| HP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Horn &lt;br /&gt;
| HRN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OWN Keyless Module &lt;br /&gt;
| RKM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| OEM Trunk Rel. Disarm &lt;br /&gt;
| OETR&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Park Brake &lt;br /&gt;
| PB&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Parking Light (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| PLN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Parking Lgiht (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| PLP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Window DOWN  &lt;br /&gt;
| PFWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| PFWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Window DOWN &lt;br /&gt;
| PRWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Window UP &lt;br /&gt;
| REWU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Front Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| PFDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pass Rear Door Pin &lt;br /&gt;
| PRDP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Antenna  &lt;br /&gt;
| PANT&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Sliding Door Left &lt;br /&gt;
| PSDL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| PWR Sliding Door Right &lt;br /&gt;
| PSDR&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Radio ACC. +12V&lt;br /&gt;
| RACCP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Constant +12V &lt;br /&gt;
| RCP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Dimmer &lt;br /&gt;
| RDIM&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Ground &lt;br /&gt;
| RCG&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Radio Illumination &lt;br /&gt;
| RILL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Rear Defrost &lt;br /&gt;
| RD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Light &lt;br /&gt;
| RL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Front (-) &lt;br /&gt;
| PFSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Front (+) &lt;br /&gt;
| PFSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Right Rear (-)&lt;br /&gt;
| PRSPN&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  Right Rear (+)&lt;br /&gt;
| PRSPP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Speed Sense  &lt;br /&gt;
| SS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Start #1 &lt;br /&gt;
| ST1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Starter #2 &lt;br /&gt;
| ST2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| SW DATA &lt;br /&gt;
| SWD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Trunk Release  &lt;br /&gt;
| TREL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Trunk/Hatch Trigger &lt;br /&gt;
| THT&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=WireSheet-Process-Flow&amp;diff=21</id>
		<title>WireSheet-Process-Flow</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=WireSheet-Process-Flow&amp;diff=21"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T14:59:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=STEP 1: Select A Vehicle From The Images To-do List=&lt;br /&gt;
CLICK HERE to view the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CLICK HERE to view guidelines on editing the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select vehicle from WireSheet.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create folder.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Folder naming convention should follow (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move folder to _01_In-Progress.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=STEP 2: Create Vehicle Profile=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Fill out Vehicle Profile Sheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create folder for each image.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image folder naming convention should follow (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR)_(WIRE).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Use the [[Wire Function Short Codes]] sheet for wire codes. If there are any wires in an image without a code, consult the group so we can assign a code and up date this guide. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• The KEY-TYPE is either PTS (push-to-start) or SK (standard key).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create Word Document.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Gather photos in Word Document. If we don’t have access to that car, use ProDemand.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Word Document consists of images and any notes necessary.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Every WIRE image gets its own folder.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;g.&#039;&#039;&#039; Save Word Document in (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR)_(WIRE) folder.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;h.&#039;&#039;&#039; Document naming convention should be dash delimited with an underscore between vehicle info and wire info. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;i.e.&#039;&#039;&#039; toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1.doc &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move to _02_Info-Ready and initial Vehicle Profile Sheet when complete.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;j.&#039;&#039;&#039;  Either Mike, Shawn, or Betts will survey the Vehicle Profile Sheet and Word Document and if approve, they will initial Vehicle Profile Sheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=STEP 3: Image Creation=&lt;br /&gt;
​&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; This step can only begin if file is housed in _02_Info-Ready and have initials from tech AND manager.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Initial in Vehicle Profile Sheet&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Obey priority list. Acknowledge highest priority and readiness.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image naming convention should be dash delimited with an underscore between vehicle info and wire info and the file should be in jpg format optimized for web/print. The filename needs to be all lower case so it&#039;s web friendly. For example, an image could end up with the filename: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;i.e.&#039;&#039;&#039; toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1.jpg &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Add additional wires to the end of extension (toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1-st1-acc1.jpg)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; JPGs will be created and add a Omega-Voxx watermark to all images in addition to any existing water marks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Web should be at 72DPI, Print is best at 144dpi.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Original tech, from Step 1, must approve image before being moved to _03_Image-Done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=STEP 4: Upload To The Server=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Upload to server.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move to _04_Published-To-DB.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=STEP 5: Enter Image Name Into Database=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Put exact image file name under each column matching each vehicle. Enter into Spreadsheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039;The names will need to be entered into the &#039;wiresheet_vehicle_pics_20180212.xls&#039; sheet so we can convert and import into the main database.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=WireSheet-Process-Flow&amp;diff=20</id>
		<title>WireSheet-Process-Flow</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=WireSheet-Process-Flow&amp;diff=20"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T14:57:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;=STEP 1: Select A Vehicle From The Images To-do List= CLICK HERE to view the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; CLICK HERE to view guidelines on editing the vehicle images to-do...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=STEP 1: Select A Vehicle From The Images To-do List=&lt;br /&gt;
CLICK HERE to view the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CLICK HERE to view guidelines on editing the vehicle images to-do list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select vehicle from WireSheet.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create folder.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Folder naming convention should follow (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move folder to _01_In-Progress.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=STEP 2: Create Vehicle Profile=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Fill out Vehicle Profile Sheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create folder for each image.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image folder naming convention should follow (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR)_(WIRE).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Use the [^http://wiki.wiresheet.com/Image%20Codes|Wire Function Short Codes] sheet for wire codes. If there are any wires in an image without a code, consult the group so we can assign a code and up date this guide. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• The KEY-TYPE is either PTS (push-to-start) or SK (standard key).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Create Word Document.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Gather photos in Word Document. If we don’t have access to that car, use ProDemand.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Word Document consists of images and any notes necessary.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Every WIRE image gets its own folder.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;g.&#039;&#039;&#039; Save Word Document in (MAKE)_(MODEL)_(KEY-TYPE)_(YEAR)_(WIRE) folder.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;h.&#039;&#039;&#039; Document naming convention should be dash delimited with an underscore between vehicle info and wire info. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;i.e.&#039;&#039;&#039; toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1.doc &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move to _02_Info-Ready and initial Vehicle Profile Sheet when complete.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;j.&#039;&#039;&#039;  Either Mike, Shawn, or Betts will survey the Vehicle Profile Sheet and Word Document and if approve, they will initial Vehicle Profile Sheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=STEP 3: Image Creation=&lt;br /&gt;
​&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; This step can only begin if file is housed in _02_Info-Ready and have initials from tech AND manager.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Initial in Vehicle Profile Sheet&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Obey priority list. Acknowledge highest priority and readiness.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Image naming convention should be dash delimited with an underscore between vehicle info and wire info and the file should be in jpg format optimized for web/print. The filename needs to be all lower case so it&#039;s web friendly. For example, an image could end up with the filename: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;i.e.&#039;&#039;&#039; toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1.jpg &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Add additional wires to the end of extension (toyota-highlander-pts-2016_cp-ig1-st1-acc1.jpg)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; JPGs will be created and add a Omega-Voxx watermark to all images in addition to any existing water marks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:• Web should be at 72DPI, Print is best at 144dpi.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Original tech, from Step 1, must approve image before being moved to _03_Image-Done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=STEP 4: Upload To The Server=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Upload to server.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Move to _04_Published-To-DB.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=STEP 5: Enter Image Name Into Database=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Put exact image file name under each column matching each vehicle. Enter into Spreadsheet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039;The names will need to be entered into the &#039;wiresheet_vehicle_pics_20180212.xls&#039; sheet so we can convert and import into the main database.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wiresheet&amp;diff=19</id>
		<title>Wiresheet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Wiresheet&amp;diff=19"/>
		<updated>2020-01-06T14:44:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;=1 - Overview= When entering vehicle information, there are a few basic formatting rules that help to keep the information consistent throughout our database.  ==Formatting==...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=1 - Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
When entering vehicle information, there are a few basic formatting rules that help to keep the information consistent throughout our database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Formatting==&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; All colors need to be listed in full caps in both the wiring section and the notes section. Location information is in full caps but only in the wiring section.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Asterisks must be used in increments of one(and starting at one) from top to bottom when indicating notes. If more than one asterisk indication is made on the same line, they must be used in increments of one from left to right. Make sure to use the correct number of asterisks and do not duplicate asterisks in the tech notes section.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Note numbers must be led by a &amp;quot;#&amp;quot; sign. In the notes section, note numbers must be followed by a hyphen and a space. The should then be followed by See &#039;&#039;title of diagram&#039;&#039; Diagram.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; When entering information, avoid using slang terms like &amp;quot;hook up&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;stick to&amp;quot;, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Polarity==&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:650px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(-)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Pulse Wire&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Pulse Wire&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(-) &amp;gt; (+)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Rest at Ground&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+) &amp;gt; (-)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Reverse Rest at Positive&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(- MUX)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Multiplex (Ground thru resistor value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+ MUX)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Multiplex (Positive Voltage thru resistor value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(- N.C.)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Negative Normally Closed (Ground at rest and opens when triggered)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;(+ N.C.)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Positive Normally Closed (Positive Voltage at rest and opens when triggered)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Colors==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Violet&#039;&#039;&#039; in place of Purple&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DK&#039;&#039;&#039; for Dark&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LT&#039;&#039;&#039; for Light&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Striped Wires are separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;Forward Slash ( / )&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Dots are separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;Forward Slash ( / ) Dots&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Example: Red/Black/Silver Dots = __Red__ wire with a __Black__ strip and __Silver Dots__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wire Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
When connector information is listed in the location field it should be formatted as follows;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wire location\connector color\connector total pins (connector abbreviated to CONN)\comma\wire pin location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;IGNITION SWITCH WHITE 6 PIN CONN, PIN 3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Tech-Calls-Workflow&amp;diff=18</id>
		<title>Tech-Calls-Workflow</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Tech-Calls-Workflow&amp;diff=18"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T20:49:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;=&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receiving A Support Request&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;=  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Call Back Requests - &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;A customer may request a support callback by sending an email, a message through social media, leaving a voice...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=&#039;&#039;&#039;Receiving A Support Request&#039;&#039;&#039;= &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Call Back Requests - &#039;&#039;&#039;A customer may request a support callback by sending an email, a message through social media, leaving a voice message at your direct extension, or within the call queues messaging system. In all cases, the request needs to be entered as a task in the appropriate queue within the Ring Cental Desktop app or web app (login at [http://www.ringcentral.com http://www.ringcentral.com]). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;About Requests Made In The Call Queue Messaging System - &#039;&#039;&#039; When a support request is made through our phone system, the caller leaves a voice message in the queue they selected. This message generates an email that is delivered to the tech@caralarm.com (aka support@caralarm.com) email account. This email account will automatically filter the message into a &amp;quot;Support Calls 1 - NEW&amp;quot;. This is regularly monitored by support staff so the request can be entered into the call back queue AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. Unnecesary delays at this step can be problematic and will discourage customers to use the system as designed. We need them to trust us. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=&#039;&#039;&#039;Entering/Logging A Support Request&#039;&#039;&#039;=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;STEP 1: &#039;&#039;&#039;Select oldest message in the &amp;quot;Support Calls 1 - NEW&amp;quot; folder, move it to &amp;quot;Support Calls 2 - In Progress&amp;quot;, and Open/View the email &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;STEP 2: &#039;&#039;&#039;Login to RingCentral, click on &amp;quot;Tech Support - Call Back Queue&amp;quot; under &amp;quot;Teams&amp;quot;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=17</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=17"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T20:47:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;MediaWiki has been installed.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome&#039;&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;This Wiki is only available to Omega support staff and Omega&#039;s authorized partners.&#039;&#039;&#039; It&#039;s designed to help guide you through installation, setup, &amp;amp; programming of Omega products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions, concerns, suggestions, keep them to yourself......OR......contact Shawn Cooper at [mailto:shawnc@caralarm.com|shawnc@caralarm.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Have fun!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&#039;&#039;&#039;Categories&#039;&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[70-series|70 Series]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[RFK-XX-SST]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[OL-RF-XX-SST]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[OL-HRN-RS Harnesses]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[CrimeStopper]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Linkr-M1]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Linkr-LT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product Testing]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SS3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tech-Calls-Workflow|Support Calls Workflow - RingCentral]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Wiresheet|Wiresheet]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[WireSheet-Process-Flow|WireSheet Images Process Flow]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User&#039;s Guide] for information on using the wiki software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Getting started ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=SS3&amp;diff=16</id>
		<title>SS3</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=SS3&amp;diff=16"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T20:42:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;=K9-SS3(all flavors)= Update to the SS2 with Brake Lock feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ==Features== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1.Auto Rearm&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - On* / Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2.Last Door Arming&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - On* / Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3.Door Lock w/...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=K9-SS3(all flavors)=&lt;br /&gt;
Update to the SS2 with Brake Lock feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.Auto Rearm&#039;&#039;&#039; - On* / Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.Last Door Arming&#039;&#039;&#039; - On* / Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.Door Lock w/ Last Door Arming&#039;&#039;&#039; - On* / Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.Unlock Pulse Count&#039;&#039;&#039; - 2 Pulse / 1 Pulse*&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.Immobilizer Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; - On / Off*&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.Siren/Horn&#039;&#039;&#039; - Siren &amp;amp; Horn* / Horn Only&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;7.Anti-Nuisance&#039;&#039;&#039; - On / Off*&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;8.Dome Light Delay Bypass&#039;&#039;&#039; - On / Off*&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;9.Ignition Anti-Carjacking&#039;&#039;&#039; - On / Off*&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;10. Remote &amp;amp; Door Anti-Carjacking&#039;&#039;&#039; - On / Off*&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;11.Blk/Wht Wire Output&#039;&#039;&#039; - Dome Light* / Window Roll Up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.Pink Wire Output&#039;&#039;&#039; - Momentary* / Window Roll up / N/O Starter Interrupt&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;13.Ignition or Brake Door Lock&#039;&#039;&#039; - Ign Lock/Unlock* / Off / Brake Lock 1 time only Unlock w/ Ign Off / Brake Lock Reset after door Open/Close Unlock w/ Ign Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;14. RFID Anti-Carjacking&#039;&#039;&#039; - On / Off*&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;15. Open Door Bypass (Ign &amp;amp; Brake Lock)&#039;&#039;&#039; - On* / Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;16.Confirmation Chirps&#039;&#039;&#039; - On* / Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;17. Security Function&#039;&#039;&#039; - On* / Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;18. Violet Wire (+) input&#039;&#039;&#039; - (+) Door Pin* / (+) Brake Lock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Door Lock/Unlock Pulse (Jumper) - On (.8 Sec)* / Off (4 Sec)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;*&amp;quot; = Default&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Feature Reset - Power up with IGN On and Valet button held. Continue to hold Valet button and press Lock on both remotes (must have both remotes to reset features).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution&#039;&#039;&#039; - After second remote is programed all outputs will become active till IGN it turned Off.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Product_Testing&amp;diff=15</id>
		<title>Product Testing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Product_Testing&amp;diff=15"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T20:31:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;=Random Things To Test For= System in valet test all none security operations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; System operation with security feature Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Change door lock timing/pulse count and test a...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Random Things To Test For=&lt;br /&gt;
System in valet test all none security operations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
System operation with security feature Off&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change door lock timing/pulse count and test all lock related operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Passive Lock/Start Lock/Lock upon prewarn-trigger/etc,..&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor detect enables full security.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2-way HHU with Time Display: Ensure AM/PM switch between 11:59 and 12:00&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware/Version Identification&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
553 = Hold P &amp;amp; Lock for 3 sec.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full system reset and feature reset&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=RF Kits using iData protocol=&lt;br /&gt;
With LED built into antenna test LED ON operation over long periods of time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-LT&amp;diff=14</id>
		<title>Linkr-LT</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-LT&amp;diff=14"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T20:24:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;=Linkr-LT2 Alarm Alerts= With last 6 of the serial number the unit can be located in the system and an Initialize command can be sent to clear and reset alert status.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Shaw...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Linkr-LT2 Alarm Alerts=&lt;br /&gt;
With last 6 of the serial number the unit can be located in the system and an Initialize command can be sent to clear and reset alert status.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ShawnC or MikeT might be able to send command from Admin site if unit was activated with Omega App.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
AutoMobility can send command to any device. Send email request to help@mycarcontrols.com to have command sent.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Linkr-LT2 Coverage Map=&lt;br /&gt;
Go to T-Mobile site and enter customers zip code.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[https://www.t-mobile.com/coverage/coverage-map T-Mobile Coverage Map]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Excellent signal&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4G LTE on T-Mobile network.  Mostly in major cities.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Good signal&#039;&#039;&#039; = 4G LTE on T-Mobile network.  Mostly in major cities.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Fair signal&#039;&#039;&#039; = 3G Fallback on AT&amp;amp;T network.  Mostly outside major cities.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Partner&#039;&#039;&#039; = 3G Fallback on AT&amp;amp;T network.  Mostly in remote locations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
AT&amp;amp;T fallback has been known to have poor to no operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=13</id>
		<title>Linkr-M1</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=13"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T20:22:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(((&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following information at your own risk. No written or expressed warranty or liability. You break it, You bought it&lt;br /&gt;
)))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=1 - Linkr Testing, Activation, &amp;amp; Troubleshooting=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==1.1 - Initial Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at omegadealer.com from PC or Smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Log in to [http://www.omegadealer.com/] and click the &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Test Activation&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Activation can take anywhere from 3 to 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the unit is powered before activation the installer &#039;&#039;&#039;MUST&#039;&#039;&#039; power cycle the unit before activation will complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The unit will stay active for 72 hours or until installer finishes test process&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If 72 hour testing window expires see {{&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[1.2 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; add any number to the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should use the Device name, Device mobile number, &amp;amp; Configuration code only&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Adding a number to the Alert Receiver Primary field will set the device in user mode and make it difficult for the real end user to operate the device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Testing functions can be done from within the app on any phone via SMS messages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; SMS command &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;w/o Alert Receiver Primary set&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039; = Lock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039;&#039; = Unlock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039; = Trunk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;4&#039;&#039;&#039; = Start&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039; = Engine Disable&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;6&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 1&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;8&#039;&#039;&#039; = Locate&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; In data mode, Locate does not require data confirmation from the host system. Use this command to verify Linkr connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Confirmations &amp;amp; ALERTS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; All confirmations will be sent to the phone number that send the test command&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Alerts will be sent to the last number a command was received from&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; It is recommended that installers test alarm alerts, especially in hardwired installations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;7.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once installation testing is complete the installer will enter the Configuration Code and Customer&#039;s Email into Linkr Test Activation webpage&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The test activation will be suspended until the customer purchases there subscription of choice on caralarm.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer will be emailed there device phone number and configuration code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.2 - User Subscription Activations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Over the phone (Customer Service or Tech Support) - NONE&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at www.caralarm.com via PC or the user&#039;s smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Register&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUPPORT -&amp;gt; Activate Your Linkr&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Follow onscreen instructions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number will be available in the customers Linkr Subscription page once the activation is complete &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.3 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Dealer needs to test but the 72 hr test window expired.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Installer must call back when he has the vehicle and is ready to test.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login at omegadealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Management&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Search for the device by MEID or its mobile number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unsuspend the device &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Tell the installer to wait 5-10 minutes for the transaction to finish before trying to test again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer will need to go to &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Activation Progress&#039; and click &#039;Finish&#039; to get the device number &amp;amp; config code (if needed) and complete setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.4 - Deactivations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;DO NOT DEACTIVATE WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Each device must stay activated for 24 months to meet Verizon requirements&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the user does not renew after the 1st year (or cancels early), we will ‘park’ the line (phone number) on a different plan and recycle the line into new activations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the line has been recycled to a different device the original unit is &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; and will not re-register with the network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Any &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; device MUST be sent to Warranty/Repair before being able to register with the network and get a new number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.5 - Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1. Status Lights &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Power – Red &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Constant&#039;&#039;&#039; - 12V power connected &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - 12V power connected &amp;amp; charging internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - 12V power disconnected &amp;amp; device is powered by internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iv.&#039;&#039;&#039; Off - 12V power disconnected (unit can still be powered by internal backup battery) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; GPS – Blue &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - Searching for GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - GPS data error &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; - GPS off (GPS will turn off after ~25 seconds of no motion &amp;amp; no ignition signal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cellular – Green &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - Transmitting on cellular network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash (less than 1 second off) - Searching for cellular signal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Slow Flash&#039;&#039;&#039; (greater than 1 second off) - Connected to cellular network &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Using status light to test ignition &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; With device in secure location and status light visible wait till GPS status light (Blue) turns off &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Without moving the device turn the vehicles ignition On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device detects ignition via data or the Yellow wire the GPS status light (Blue) should turn On or begin to flash &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2. Unit does not respond to any commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check MEID status in OmegaDealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Report&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter MEID or Device Number in respective field then click &#039;Search&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Suspended, the installer clicked &#039;Finish&#039; in the activation screen or exceeded the 72 hour test window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; See  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;for re-activation steps&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Default the installer did not activate that MEID number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify correct MEID and compare to device phone number being used&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Find incorrectly activated device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Active the device is online&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is In Progress the activation process has begun but is not complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Be patient, this could take 3 - 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check device settings and be sure there is no number listed in the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; If a number has EVER been listed in that field installer will need to perform the Device Reset and resend the settings&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn the ignition key On and Off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Timing is important, it needs to be slower than most programming processes. The key should be On for approximately 1/2 seconds every time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; After the 5th key cycle to Off re-send the correct device setting&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for confirmation text message on installer’s phone, approximately 1 - 3 Minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3. Unit responds commands but the host system does not Lock/Unlock/Start.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default Configuration Code is 001009, all analog outputs. Be sure settings update was sent AND responded to.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol. VerXX of the Linkr-M1 firmware sends blind confirmation, meaning the response is confirmation of message sent and not action performed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4. Unit only responds to settings updates and GPS commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; If Blade is used be sure firmware support telematics gateway&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; To test this remove Blade and send commands from Linkr. Door locks may not work as the Blade may be needed but the alarm should respond with arm/disarm light flash and chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5. Unit does not send alarm alert.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Valet Status&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Send the Valet command from the app and confirm confirmation messsage is &amp;quot;Valet Mode OFF&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.6 - Changing Config Code==&lt;br /&gt;
1. After the system settings have been sent with primary alert receiver set the config code is locked &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. To change the config code the app needs to temporarily be placed back into installer mode (remove primary alert receiver) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol next to config code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the config code wizard to make the desired changes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Apply new configuration code&amp;quot; button &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the screen returns to the setting page ensure all alert receivers are correct then select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release no longer locks the config code when the primary alert receiver set.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.7 - Returning to Installer Mode==&lt;br /&gt;
1. If the phone being used  &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the phone number being used as primary alert receiver &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Continue with #2 below&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. If the phone being used &#039;&#039;&#039;IS&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The device is now back in installer mode &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release will not allow you to switch from Installer Mode to User Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are in Installer Mode you must delete the device and reinstall it in the app to return to User Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.8 - Unit Swap==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; DO NOT SWAP UNITS WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done on ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Troubleshoot before swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check LED&#039;s for power and connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify device phone number by looking up MEID in the OmegaDealer or ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Perform alert receiver synchronize&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Talk to manager to confirm conclusion&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unit swap can only be performed by management (Shawn or Mike) at this time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; Information needed for unit swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Picture of both devices showing the MEID label clearly&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Instructions &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login to ORBCOMM Portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUBSCRIBER -&amp;gt; SWAP&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter old &amp;amp; new MEID - VERIFY 38 times - DO NOT GET IT WRONG&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Swap can ONLY be done with new MEID that has not been activated. Be sure replacement unit is NOT configured in OrbComm&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.9 - iMessage De-Register==&lt;br /&gt;
If messages from an iPhone to the Linkr are being send as iMessage (Blue) and not SMS messages (Green) we will need to de-register the number with apple.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Configure the device with Pass-thru Messages turned On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039;To send the message as an SMS the user can temporaraly disable iMessage on the phone in Settings &amp;gt; Messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the device phone number in the Apple website, [https://selfsolve.apple.com/deregister-imessage/], then click Send Code.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer should receive a forwarded message with a confirmation code to enter into the second step.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be added&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
=2 - Linkr App Notes=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Android app V2.67.00(30)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
www.caralarm.com/linkr/Android/Linkr_v2-67-30.apk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internal Data&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OrbComm Service Plan Reference&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Omega Plan - VZ plan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lite 100          VZ200&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Std 350          VZ500S&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Plus 500        VZ450&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Max 1000       VZ710&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=12</id>
		<title>Linkr-M1</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Linkr-M1&amp;diff=12"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T20:20:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot; ((( Use the following information at your own risk. No written or expressed warranty or liability. You break it, You bought it )))    =1 - Linkr Testing, Activation, &amp;amp; Troubl...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(((&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following information at your own risk. No written or expressed warranty or liability. You break it, You bought it&lt;br /&gt;
)))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=1 - Linkr Testing, Activation, &amp;amp; Troubleshooting=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==1.1 - Initial Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at omegadealer.com from PC or Smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Log in to [http://www.omegadealer.com/] and click the &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Test Activation&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Activation can take anywhere from 3 to 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the unit is powered before activation the installer &#039;&#039;&#039;MUST&#039;&#039;&#039; power cycle the unit before activation will complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The unit will stay active for 72 hours or until installer finishes test process&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; If 72 hour testing window expires see {{&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[1.2 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;}}&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; add any number to the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer should use the Device name, Device mobile number, &amp;amp; Configuration code only&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Adding a number to the Alert Receiver Primary field will set the device in user mode and make it difficult for the real end user to operate the device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Testing functions can be done from within the app on any phone via SMS messages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; SMS command &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;w/o Alert Receiver Primary set&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039; = Lock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039;&#039; = Unlock&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039; = Trunk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;4&#039;&#039;&#039; = Start&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;5&#039;&#039;&#039; = Engine Disable&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;6&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 1&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039; = AUX 2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;8&#039;&#039;&#039; = Locate&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; In data mode, Locate does not require data confirmation from the host system. Use this command to verify Linkr connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Confirmations &amp;amp; ALERTS&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; All confirmations will be sent to the phone number that send the test command&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Alerts will be sent to the last number a command was received from&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; It is recommended that installers test alarm alerts, especially in hardwired installations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;7.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once installation testing is complete the installer will enter the Configuration Code and Customer&#039;s Email into Linkr Test Activation webpage&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The test activation will be suspended until the customer purchases there subscription of choice on caralarm.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer will be emailed there device phone number and configuration code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.2 - User Subscription Activations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Over the phone (Customer Service or Tech Support) - NONE&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done at www.caralarm.com via PC or the user&#039;s smartphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Register&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUPPORT -&amp;gt; Activate Your Linkr&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Follow onscreen instructions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The number will be available in the customers Linkr Subscription page once the activation is complete &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.3 - Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Dealer needs to test but the 72 hr test window expired.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Installer must call back when he has the vehicle and is ready to test.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login at omegadealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Management&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Search for the device by MEID or its mobile number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unsuspend the device &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Tell the installer to wait 5-10 minutes for the transaction to finish before trying to test again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; The installer will need to go to &#039;Installer Tools&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Activation Progress&#039; and click &#039;Finish&#039; to get the device number &amp;amp; config code (if needed) and complete setup.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.4 - Deactivations==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;DO NOT DEACTIVATE WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Each device must stay activated for 24 months to meet Verizon requirements&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the user does not renew after the 1st year (or cancels early), we will ‘park’ the line (phone number) on a different plan and recycle the line into new activations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the line has been recycled to a different device the original unit is &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; and will not re-register with the network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Any &#039;&#039;Bricked&#039;&#039; device MUST be sent to Warranty/Repair before being able to register with the network and get a new number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.5 - Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1. Status Lights &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Power – Red &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Constant&#039;&#039;&#039; - 12V power connected &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - 12V power connected &amp;amp; charging internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - 12V power disconnected &amp;amp; device is powered by internal backup battery &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iv.&#039;&#039;&#039; Off - 12V power disconnected (unit can still be powered by internal backup battery) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; GPS – Blue &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash - Searching for GPS lock &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Slow Flash - GPS data error &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; - GPS off (GPS will turn off after ~25 seconds of no motion &amp;amp; no ignition signal)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cellular – Green &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Constant - Transmitting on cellular network&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Rapid Flash (less than 1 second off) - Searching for cellular signal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Slow Flash&#039;&#039;&#039; (greater than 1 second off) - Connected to cellular network &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Using status light to test ignition &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; With device in secure location and status light visible wait till GPS status light (Blue) turns off &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Without moving the device turn the vehicles ignition On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;iii.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device detects ignition via data or the Yellow wire the GPS status light (Blue) should turn On or begin to flash &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2. Unit does not respond to any commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check MEID status in OmegaDealer.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Go to &#039;Linkr Support&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;Linkr Subscription Report&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;ii.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter MEID or Device Number in respective field then click &#039;Search&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Suspended, the installer clicked &#039;Finish&#039; in the activation screen or exceeded the 72 hour test window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; See  &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Testing After the 72 Hour Test Activation&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;for re-activation steps&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Default the installer did not activate that MEID number&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify correct MEID and compare to device phone number being used&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Find incorrectly activated device&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is Active the device is online&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; If the device status is In Progress the activation process has begun but is not complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Be patient, this could take 3 - 30+ minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check device settings and be sure there is no number listed in the Alert Receiver Primary field&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; If a number has EVER been listed in that field installer will need to perform the Device Reset and resend the settings&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Turn the ignition key On and Off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Timing is important, it needs to be slower than most programming processes. The key should be On for approximately 1/2 seconds every time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; After the 5th key cycle to Off re-send the correct device setting&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::::&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for confirmation text message on installer’s phone, approximately 1 - 3 Minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3. Unit responds commands but the host system does not Lock/Unlock/Start.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; The default Configuration Code is 001009, all analog outputs. Be sure settings update was sent AND responded to.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol. VerXX of the Linkr-M1 firmware sends blind confirmation, meaning the response is confirmation of message sent and not action performed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4. Unit only responds to settings updates and GPS commands.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check the data port protocol setting and ensure iData is the selected protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; If Blade is used be sure firmware support telematics gateway&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; To test this remove Blade and send commands from Linkr. Door locks may not work as the Blade may be needed but the alarm should respond with arm/disarm light flash and chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5. Unit does not send alarm alert.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check Valet Status&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;i.&#039;&#039;&#039; Send the Valet command from the app and confirm confirmation messsage is &amp;quot;Valet Mode OFF&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.6 - Changing Config Code==&lt;br /&gt;
1. After the system settings have been sent with primary alert receiver set the config code is locked &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. To change the config code the app needs to temporarily be placed back into installer mode (remove primary alert receiver) &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol next to config code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Use the config code wizard to make the desired changes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Apply new configuration code&amp;quot; button &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Once the screen returns to the setting page ensure all alert receivers are correct then select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;f.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release no longer locks the config code when the primary alert receiver set.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.7 - Returning to Installer Mode==&lt;br /&gt;
1. If the phone being used  &#039;&#039;&#039;IS NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the phone number being used as primary alert receiver &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; Continue with #2 below&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. If the phone being used &#039;&#039;&#039;IS&#039;&#039;&#039; saved as the primary alert receiver: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Erase all alert receivers from device setting within app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Cycle vehicle ignition on &amp;amp; off 5 times within 10 seconds &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; from the setting screen of the app &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Wait for text message confirmation with current configuration code &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;e.&#039;&#039;&#039; The device is now back in installer mode &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Latest APP release will not allow you to switch from Installer Mode to User Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are in Installer Mode you must delete the device and reinstall it in the app to return to User Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
==1.8 - Unit Swap==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; DO NOT SWAP UNITS WITHOUT SUPERVISOR APPROVAL&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Must be done on ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Troubleshoot before swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Check LED&#039;s for power and connectivity&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Verify device phone number by looking up MEID in the OmegaDealer or ORBCOMM portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Perform alert receiver synchronize&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;d.&#039;&#039;&#039; Talk to manager to confirm conclusion&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Unit swap can only be performed by management (Shawn or Mike) at this time&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; Information needed for unit swap&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Picture of both devices showing the MEID label clearly&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Instructions &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039; Login to ORBCOMM Portal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;b.&#039;&#039;&#039; Click SUBSCRIBER -&amp;gt; SWAP&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;c.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter old &amp;amp; new MEID - VERIFY 38 times - DO NOT GET IT WRONG&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Swap can ONLY be done with new MEID that has not been activated. Be sure replacement unit is NOT configured in OrbComm&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.9 - iMessage De-Register==&lt;br /&gt;
If messages from an iPhone to the Linkr are being send as iMessage (Blue) and not SMS messages (Green) we will need to de-register the number with apple.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Configure the device with Pass-thru Messages turned On &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;a.&#039;&#039;&#039;To send the message as an SMS the user can temporaraly disable iMessage on the phone in Settings &amp;gt; Messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Enter the device phone number in the Apple website, [https://selfsolve.apple.com/deregister-imessage/], then click Send Code.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The customer should receive a forwarded message with a confirmation code to enter into the second step.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be added&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2 - Linkr App Notes=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Android app V2.67.00(30)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
www.caralarm.com/linkr/Android/Linkr_v2-67-30.apk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Internal Data&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OrbComm Service Plan Reference&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Omega Plan - VZ plan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lite 100          VZ200&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Std 350          VZ500S&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Plus 500        VZ450&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Max 1000       VZ710&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=OL-HRN-RS_Harnesses&amp;diff=11</id>
		<title>OL-HRN-RS Harnesses</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=OL-HRN-RS_Harnesses&amp;diff=11"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T19:13:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot; =TB Coverage= TB-FM2 and TB-FM3 firmware can be used with the respective OL-HRN-RS harness. Other TB applications have been evaluated and none have been found to have suffici...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=TB Coverage=&lt;br /&gt;
TB-FM2 and TB-FM3 firmware can be used with the respective OL-HRN-RS harness. Other TB applications have been evaluated and none have been found to have sufficient coverage or compatibility. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instruction page showing harness modification needed is posted on [https://www.wiresheet.com/v3/install_guides/OmegaLink-Excalibur%20T-Harnesses/OL-HRN-RS-FM2-FM3%20WITH%20OL-MIB-KO.pdf HERE]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=RS Coverage=&lt;br /&gt;
The following harnesses will have adapters included to utilize the OL-MDB-ALL with RS firmware.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-TL6&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-TL7&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-NI8&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-FM8 V2.0&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Not Yet In Production=&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-TL6 samples in the field testing&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-TL7 is being researched/drawn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-NI3 is being researched/drawn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-NI8 is being researched/drawn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-NI5 is awaiting matching connector from maker for IMMO&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Adaptor Harnesses=&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-PWR = Universal power harness (main 6-pin) for any brand remote start&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OL-HRN-RS-PWR-CST = Power adaptor harness to connect Crimestopper remote starts to Omega T-Harnesses&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=OL-RF-XX-SST&amp;diff=10</id>
		<title>OL-RF-XX-SST</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=OL-RF-XX-SST&amp;diff=10"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T19:07:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* Alternative TX Programming */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
RF antenna using the ADS partner protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Remote data is shared between the RS module and the antenna so remotes MUST be programed upon installation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Remote can NOT be preprogrammed at the time of production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Some features (Passive Lock, Programmable RS activation, LED flashes, etc..) of the other Omega RF kits are not available&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Button operation is slightly different then other Omega product.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Signal is transmitted upon button release. The most noticeable difference is RS activation, two quick presses will activate RS. It is recommended that dealer/installer operate the RS a few times before demo to get familiar with the operation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware updateable via weblink&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Firmware Versions=&lt;br /&gt;
Production Version - V1.02&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Update Version - V1.03&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Correct data bits to display firmware version correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Alternative TX Programming=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;With ADS hardware&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition and antenna button(Listed in guide)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Ignition ON press and release antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Led in antenna will turn ON&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Press lock on each remote to learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Release antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition 5x:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Ignition OFF-ON  5 times (5th time you need to stay on ignition)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Press lock on each remote to learn (5 sec to press lock between each lock)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Turn OFF ignition&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Unit will most likely end up in valet mode. You will need to cycle the ignition 5x to get out of valet mode&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition and Brake&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Ignition ON/OFF/ON, leave in the ON position&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Press and release brake 3 times&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Press lock on each remote to learn (5 sec to press lock between each lock)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Turn ignition OFF&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=OL-RF-XX-SST&amp;diff=9</id>
		<title>OL-RF-XX-SST</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=OL-RF-XX-SST&amp;diff=9"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T18:48:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;=Overview= RF antenna using the ADS partner protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; :1. Remote data is shared between the RS module and the antenna so remotes MUST be programed upon installation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; :2...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
RF antenna using the ADS partner protocol&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1. Remote data is shared between the RS module and the antenna so remotes MUST be programed upon installation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2. Remote can NOT be preprogrammed at the time of production.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:3. Some features (Passive Lock, Programmable RS activation, LED flashes, etc..) of the other Omega RF kits are not available&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Button operation is slightly different then other Omega product.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Signal is transmitted upon button release. The most noticeable difference is RS activation, two quick presses will activate RS. It is recommended that dealer/installer operate the RS a few times before demo to get familiar with the operation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware updateable via weblink&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Firmware Versions=&lt;br /&gt;
Production Version - V1.02&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Update Version - V1.03&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Correct data bits to display firmware version correctly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Alternative TX Programming=&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;with ADS hardware&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition and antenna button(Listed in guide)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Ignition ON press and release antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Led in antenna will turn ON&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Press lock on each remote to learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Release antenna button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition 5x:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Ignition OFF-ON  5 times (5th time you need to stay on ignition)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Press lock on each remote to learn (5 sec to press lock between each lock)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Turn OFF ignition&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: Unit will most likely end up in valet mode. You will need to cycle the ignition 5x to get out of valet mode&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition and Brake&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Ignition ON/OFF/ON, leave in the ON position&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Press and release brake 3 times&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Press lock on each remote to learn (5 sec to press lock between each lock)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. Turn ignition OFF&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=RFK-XX-SST&amp;diff=8</id>
		<title>RFK-XX-SST</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=RFK-XX-SST&amp;diff=8"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T18:41:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;=Protocol Detection= Upon power up the unit will detect voltage to determine which protocol to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 12V = DBI (RF Kit) 3 Flashes upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 5V = RF (70-Series Anten...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Protocol Detection=&lt;br /&gt;
Upon power up the unit will detect voltage to determine which protocol to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
12V = DBI (RF Kit) 3 Flashes upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5V = RF (70-Series Antenna) 2 Flashes upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=RF kit Operation=&lt;br /&gt;
===Feature Reset===&lt;br /&gt;
Ignition On-Off, valet 10x&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Press Lock/Unlock together or Brake 5x&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=7</id>
		<title>70-series</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=7"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T18:39:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* 2-Way Antenna Update */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=New 70 Series Features=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; - Turn the ignition &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;, immediately press the valet button 10 times. After long siren chirp/horn honk press Lock &amp;amp; Unlock together on the remote or press the Brake Pedal 5 times. The system will chirp twice and exit programming with all features set to OEM defaults.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To ignore 3D motion from antenna or sensor disconnect Neutral Safety and perform VL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;V1.6 will ignore 3D motion unless M/T reservation mode (Installer Feature #11) is set to one of the Manual Transmission options.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Vehicle Learn (See V1.6 for new process)=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If needed&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, press valet to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. (&#039;&#039;This step was left out of some early production manuals&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF The system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within 20 sec. of Step 4, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: OPTIONAL: To enable Manual Transmission Reservation mode, set the parking brake. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(The BLACK/WHITE wire must be connected to the parking brake.) System should chirp/flash lights 1x. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 8&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
*With Green/Red and Green/Black not programed as CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 (Feature 10/18) the two way remote will not confirm CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 operation but the data output (Left Sliding Door and Gas Cap) will still operate.(fixed in v1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Installer Feature #20 (Low Current Mode) does not program via WebLink. (Fixed in V1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When using AU-84TDP you must not use Black/White (Neutral Safety) and go thru VL to prevent false 3D status. (fixed in AU-84TDP firmware update)&lt;br /&gt;
*When using data module for door triggers on X70 the Zone Violation Recall will show Hood (2 Flashes) for door trigger. Door triggers report properly from data module with XX70-B. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When connected to I IGN and 2 ACC circuits VL will not learn properly. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Any time updates are done thru WebLink the current feature settings of the unit are maintained. To see new default settings you must power the brain and do a system reset.[70-series|http://wiki.wiresheet.com/70-series?NoRedirect=1#New_HA_Series_Features_9]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.0=&lt;br /&gt;
Available July 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Original Release &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Progressive Voltage - monitor battery voltage (0.3V increase from rest) for 1 min after RS then ignore any voltage change for the remaining RS runtime&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Vehicle Learn process (See Below)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New antennas and remotes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All units have temp sensor included &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can not configure features via OmegaWebLink &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.1=&lt;br /&gt;
Available September 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct Lock operation after takeover &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Blade detection does not operate properly. If Blade flashes Red-Red-Blue-repeat the installer will need to set installer feature #12 to 2nd or 3rd option so Blade port is in iData protocol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.2=&lt;br /&gt;
Available April 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct auto data protocol select when Blade is present &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allow Lock operation during Vehicle Learn for some PTS vehicles &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct analog hood trigger input RS shutdown process in RS-X70 units &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1+1 button remotes will allow Unlock Only when programed with installer feature #13 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.3=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Latch output option for Channel 4&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
High Temp RS feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 programmable temperature settings for Low Temp starting and 4 programmable temperature settings for High Temp&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Low Volt auto start and Low Battery notification for 2-way TX set to 11.5V&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
No delay to 3rd, 4th, and 5th channel operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.4=&lt;br /&gt;
Available February 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
iData protocol updated to support Linkr-LT1 confirmations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.5=&lt;br /&gt;
Available August 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default runtime now 15 minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default protocol set to Black=iData/Green=DBI&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New TX RS activation options (user feature #8). Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 3 seconds (option 5) &amp;amp; Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 4 seconds (option 6).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(4-button &amp;amp; 2-button TX only, 1-button will be set to press 2x when these options are selected)&lt;br /&gt;
Lift gate status via data causing 3 chirps on arm fixed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pulse Ignition On Disarm (installer feature #14) will now pulse the Ignition &amp;amp; Accessory outputs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 2-way confirmation will work when Green/Red &amp;amp; Green/Black are NOT set to CH4 or CH5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Glow Plug State via iData protocol. Start time will be controlled by Glow Plug State when feature is supported by bypass module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
M/T setup (installer feature #11) mode now has 2 new options. Shut down and lock on door close (option 3) &amp;amp; Shut down and lock 10 seconds after door close (option 4)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Tach Learn process:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Start engine with the key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hold Brake pedal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press and release valet button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Entering tach learn will confirm with 5 chirps/light flashes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid tach signal is present system will set Engine Detection to Tach and learn tach&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Release Brake or turn Ignition OFF to exit tach learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Old and New Tach Learn process will switch Engine Detection feature to tach wire and learn valid tach &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid signal is present&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer reports 5 chirps after starting vehicle. New tach learn process can be triggered &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;IF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the customer pulses the brake pedal after starting the car.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.6=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2019&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not recognize 2 ACC circuits - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not setting Engine Detection (Installer Feature #3) or Data Protocol (Installer Feature #12) after update - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware version now indicated by LED upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Seconds after power up the status LED will give long and short flashes to indicate unit firmware version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; One long flash followed by six short flashes = V1.6&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor pre-warn is now 4 chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3D sensor will ONLY be monitored when any reservation mode (installer Feature #11) option is selected&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Horn output (User Feature #5) now defaulted to Human Panic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pit-Stop and Reservation Mode setup required the key to be on for more than 10 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tach Learn (key ON, Brake 5x) will NOT function after RS takeover.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL Step 6 extended from 20 seconds to 60 seconds. More time to get away from the car with a PTS fob. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New Alarm Test Mode:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press &amp;amp; Hold the Valet button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Within 1.5 seconds press lock on the remote. (any arm command, &#039;&#039;ex. OE remote, Telematics Lock/Arm command&#039;&#039;, etc, will work)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Status LED will begin to flash rapidly.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The siren/horn will chirp upon any zone trigger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 Chirp - Sensor Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Chirps - Hood Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:3 Chirps - Door Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:4 Chirps - Pre-warn Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps are thru Horn/Siren ONLY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps will repeat every 2 seconds for the duration of the trigger, meaning, if the alarm detects hood open the siren will chirp 2 times every 2 seconds till the hood is closed.&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple zones are triggered the chirps will alternate between all triggered zones every 2 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press Lock or Unlock or power cycle the alarm to exit Alarm Test Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: There is no anti-nuisance prevention in this mode. Chirps will continue till the zone is cleared, the mode is exited, the alarm is powered down, or the end of time, which ever comes first.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode if operational with or without alarm functions &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode does NOT confirm thru 2-way remotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New VL Process&#039;&#039;&#039;(changes &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underlined&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;pressing the valet button 3x within 5 seconds&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: If needed, press valet button to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Manual&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;: Manual Transmission, Release parking brake, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected (see above). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set the parking brake again, the system will chirp/flash lights to indicate the setting of Installer Feature #11 (Default 2x).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Release and re-set parking brake to select desired MT Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 chirp=MT Mode w/ shut down on door lock from remote, 2 chirps=MT Mode OFF (Default), 3 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down on door close, 4 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down 10 sec after door close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Activate RS and exit the vehicle, the engine will shut down according to the option chosen (when locked, after door closed, or 10 sec after door closed) .&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;60&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; sec. of Step 5, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the brake pedal is pressed before the engine running condition (10 seconds after crank) is met, no settings will be saved and VL must be done again.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Remote Update=&lt;br /&gt;
All 2-way remotes turn off the receiver until an arm confirmation is received to extend battery life.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Any unlock confirmation will turn off receiver in 2-way remotes. This means if you arm CAR 1 than switch to CAR 2 and disarm the receiver in the remote will be off. You will not receive alerts from CAR 1 unless you arm CAR 2 or switch to CAR 1 and do a status update (&amp;quot;P&amp;quot; then Lock). This is normal operation.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative CAR1/CAR2 switching. Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then Unlock to change between CAR1/CAR2. Holding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; and Lock or Unlock will still switch CAR1/CAR2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 3 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 4 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; twice then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 5 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; three times then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New remote firmware identification:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1110 V1.3 = LED flash and chirp upon power up. Long followed by 3 short(s) = v1.3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.2 = New RS tone played upon power up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.3 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the clock will display the firmware version, v1.x.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1511 v1.2 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the lock LED will flash once and the unlock LED will flash twice for v1.2.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current HHU Firmware:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1110 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1510 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1511 - v1.2 (v1.3 in testing)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 5 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 short beep.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Release all buttons within 3 seconds, and then press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 1 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Remove battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold button and insert battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Hold button approx 3 sec.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;*1110 Reset Tip:&#039;&#039; With PCB still in front half of remote case place paper under battery contact. Hold button and remove paper to easily perform reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Antenna Update=&lt;br /&gt;
REC-2N9-3D updated with new IC (11/2019). No operational changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New IC noted by Red dot on tab below 4-pin connector&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=6</id>
		<title>70-series</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=6"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T17:50:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=New 70 Series Features=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; - Turn the ignition &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;, immediately press the valet button 10 times. After long siren chirp/horn honk press Lock &amp;amp; Unlock together on the remote or press the Brake Pedal 5 times. The system will chirp twice and exit programming with all features set to OEM defaults.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To ignore 3D motion from antenna or sensor disconnect Neutral Safety and perform VL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;V1.6 will ignore 3D motion unless M/T reservation mode (Installer Feature #11) is set to one of the Manual Transmission options.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Vehicle Learn (See V1.6 for new process)=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If needed&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, press valet to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. (&#039;&#039;This step was left out of some early production manuals&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF The system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within 20 sec. of Step 4, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: OPTIONAL: To enable Manual Transmission Reservation mode, set the parking brake. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(The BLACK/WHITE wire must be connected to the parking brake.) System should chirp/flash lights 1x. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 8&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
*With Green/Red and Green/Black not programed as CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 (Feature 10/18) the two way remote will not confirm CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 operation but the data output (Left Sliding Door and Gas Cap) will still operate.(fixed in v1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Installer Feature #20 (Low Current Mode) does not program via WebLink. (Fixed in V1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When using AU-84TDP you must not use Black/White (Neutral Safety) and go thru VL to prevent false 3D status. (fixed in AU-84TDP firmware update)&lt;br /&gt;
*When using data module for door triggers on X70 the Zone Violation Recall will show Hood (2 Flashes) for door trigger. Door triggers report properly from data module with XX70-B. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When connected to I IGN and 2 ACC circuits VL will not learn properly. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Any time updates are done thru WebLink the current feature settings of the unit are maintained. To see new default settings you must power the brain and do a system reset.[70-series|http://wiki.wiresheet.com/70-series?NoRedirect=1#New_HA_Series_Features_9]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.0=&lt;br /&gt;
Available July 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Original Release &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Progressive Voltage - monitor battery voltage (0.3V increase from rest) for 1 min after RS then ignore any voltage change for the remaining RS runtime&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Vehicle Learn process (See Below)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New antennas and remotes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All units have temp sensor included &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can not configure features via OmegaWebLink &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.1=&lt;br /&gt;
Available September 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct Lock operation after takeover &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Blade detection does not operate properly. If Blade flashes Red-Red-Blue-repeat the installer will need to set installer feature #12 to 2nd or 3rd option so Blade port is in iData protocol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.2=&lt;br /&gt;
Available April 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct auto data protocol select when Blade is present &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allow Lock operation during Vehicle Learn for some PTS vehicles &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct analog hood trigger input RS shutdown process in RS-X70 units &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1+1 button remotes will allow Unlock Only when programed with installer feature #13 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.3=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Latch output option for Channel 4&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
High Temp RS feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 programmable temperature settings for Low Temp starting and 4 programmable temperature settings for High Temp&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Low Volt auto start and Low Battery notification for 2-way TX set to 11.5V&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
No delay to 3rd, 4th, and 5th channel operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.4=&lt;br /&gt;
Available February 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
iData protocol updated to support Linkr-LT1 confirmations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.5=&lt;br /&gt;
Available August 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default runtime now 15 minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default protocol set to Black=iData/Green=DBI&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New TX RS activation options (user feature #8). Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 3 seconds (option 5) &amp;amp; Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 4 seconds (option 6).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(4-button &amp;amp; 2-button TX only, 1-button will be set to press 2x when these options are selected)&lt;br /&gt;
Lift gate status via data causing 3 chirps on arm fixed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pulse Ignition On Disarm (installer feature #14) will now pulse the Ignition &amp;amp; Accessory outputs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 2-way confirmation will work when Green/Red &amp;amp; Green/Black are NOT set to CH4 or CH5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Glow Plug State via iData protocol. Start time will be controlled by Glow Plug State when feature is supported by bypass module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
M/T setup (installer feature #11) mode now has 2 new options. Shut down and lock on door close (option 3) &amp;amp; Shut down and lock 10 seconds after door close (option 4)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Tach Learn process:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Start engine with the key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hold Brake pedal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press and release valet button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Entering tach learn will confirm with 5 chirps/light flashes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid tach signal is present system will set Engine Detection to Tach and learn tach&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Release Brake or turn Ignition OFF to exit tach learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Old and New Tach Learn process will switch Engine Detection feature to tach wire and learn valid tach &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid signal is present&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer reports 5 chirps after starting vehicle. New tach learn process can be triggered &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;IF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the customer pulses the brake pedal after starting the car.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.6=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2019&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not recognize 2 ACC circuits - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not setting Engine Detection (Installer Feature #3) or Data Protocol (Installer Feature #12) after update - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware version now indicated by LED upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Seconds after power up the status LED will give long and short flashes to indicate unit firmware version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; One long flash followed by six short flashes = V1.6&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor pre-warn is now 4 chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3D sensor will ONLY be monitored when any reservation mode (installer Feature #11) option is selected&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Horn output (User Feature #5) now defaulted to Human Panic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pit-Stop and Reservation Mode setup required the key to be on for more than 10 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tach Learn (key ON, Brake 5x) will NOT function after RS takeover.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL Step 6 extended from 20 seconds to 60 seconds. More time to get away from the car with a PTS fob. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New Alarm Test Mode:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press &amp;amp; Hold the Valet button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Within 1.5 seconds press lock on the remote. (any arm command, &#039;&#039;ex. OE remote, Telematics Lock/Arm command&#039;&#039;, etc, will work)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Status LED will begin to flash rapidly.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The siren/horn will chirp upon any zone trigger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 Chirp - Sensor Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Chirps - Hood Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:3 Chirps - Door Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:4 Chirps - Pre-warn Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps are thru Horn/Siren ONLY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps will repeat every 2 seconds for the duration of the trigger, meaning, if the alarm detects hood open the siren will chirp 2 times every 2 seconds till the hood is closed.&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple zones are triggered the chirps will alternate between all triggered zones every 2 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press Lock or Unlock or power cycle the alarm to exit Alarm Test Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: There is no anti-nuisance prevention in this mode. Chirps will continue till the zone is cleared, the mode is exited, the alarm is powered down, or the end of time, which ever comes first.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode if operational with or without alarm functions &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode does NOT confirm thru 2-way remotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New VL Process&#039;&#039;&#039;(changes &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underlined&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;pressing the valet button 3x within 5 seconds&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: If needed, press valet button to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Manual&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;: Manual Transmission, Release parking brake, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected (see above). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set the parking brake again, the system will chirp/flash lights to indicate the setting of Installer Feature #11 (Default 2x).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Release and re-set parking brake to select desired MT Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 chirp=MT Mode w/ shut down on door lock from remote, 2 chirps=MT Mode OFF (Default), 3 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down on door close, 4 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down 10 sec after door close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Activate RS and exit the vehicle, the engine will shut down according to the option chosen (when locked, after door closed, or 10 sec after door closed) .&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;60&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; sec. of Step 5, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the brake pedal is pressed before the engine running condition (10 seconds after crank) is met, no settings will be saved and VL must be done again.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Remote Update=&lt;br /&gt;
All 2-way remotes turn off the receiver until an arm confirmation is received to extend battery life.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Any unlock confirmation will turn off receiver in 2-way remotes. This means if you arm CAR 1 than switch to CAR 2 and disarm the receiver in the remote will be off. You will not receive alerts from CAR 1 unless you arm CAR 2 or switch to CAR 1 and do a status update (&amp;quot;P&amp;quot; then Lock). This is normal operation.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative CAR1/CAR2 switching. Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then Unlock to change between CAR1/CAR2. Holding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; and Lock or Unlock will still switch CAR1/CAR2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 3 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 4 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; twice then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 5 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; three times then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New remote firmware identification:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1110 V1.3 = LED flash and chirp upon power up. Long followed by 3 short(s) = v1.3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.2 = New RS tone played upon power up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.3 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the clock will display the firmware version, v1.x.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1511 v1.2 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the lock LED will flash once and the unlock LED will flash twice for v1.2.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current HHU Firmware:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1110 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1510 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1511 - v1.2 (v1.3 in testing)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 5 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 short beep.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Release all buttons within 3 seconds, and then press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 1 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Remove battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold button and insert battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Hold button approx 3 sec.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;*1110 Reset Tip:&#039;&#039; With PCB still in front half of remote case place paper under battery contact. Hold button and remove paper to easily perform reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Antenna Update=&lt;br /&gt;
REC-2N9-3D updated with new IC (11/2019). No operational changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New IC noted by Red dot on tab below 4-pin connector&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[image:{UP(70-series)}REC-2N9_Update.gif|medium|REC-2N9-3D_Update_Marking]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=5</id>
		<title>70-series</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=5"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T16:54:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=New 70 Series Features=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; - Turn the ignition &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;, immediately press the valet button 10 times. After long siren chirp/horn honk press Lock &amp;amp; Unlock together on the remote or press the Brake Pedal 5 times. The system will chirp twice and exit programming with all features set to OEM defaults.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To ignore 3D motion from antenna or sensor disconnect Neutral Safety and perform VL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;V1.6 will ignore 3D motion unless M/T reservation mode (Installer Feature #11) is set to one of the Manual Transmission options.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Vehicle Learn (See V1.6 for new process)=&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If needed&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, press valet to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. (&#039;&#039;This step was left out of some early production manuals&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF The system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within 20 sec. of Step 4, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: OPTIONAL: To enable Manual Transmission Reservation mode, set the parking brake. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(The BLACK/WHITE wire must be connected to the parking brake.) System should chirp/flash lights 1x. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 8&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Notes==&lt;br /&gt;
*With Green/Red and Green/Black not programed as CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 (Feature 10/18) the two way remote will not confirm CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 operation but the data output (Left Sliding Door and Gas Cap) will still operate.(fixed in v1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Installer Feature #20 (Low Current Mode) does not program via WebLink. (Fixed in V1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When using AU-84TDP you must not use Black/White (Neutral Safety) and go thru VL to prevent false 3D status. (fixed in AU-84TDP firmware update)&lt;br /&gt;
*When using data module for door triggers on X70 the Zone Violation Recall will show Hood (2 Flashes) for door trigger. Door triggers report properly from data module with XX70-B. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*When connected to I IGN and 2 ACC circuits VL will not learn properly. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Any time updates are done thru WebLink the current feature settings of the unit are maintained. To see new default settings you must power the brain and do a system reset.[70-series|http://wiki.wiresheet.com/70-series?NoRedirect=1#New_HA_Series_Features_9]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.0=&lt;br /&gt;
Available July 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Original Release &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Progressive Voltage - monitor battery voltage (0.3V increase from rest) for 1 min after RS then ignore any voltage change for the remaining RS runtime&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Vehicle Learn process (See Below)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New antennas and remotes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All units have temp sensor included &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can not configure features via OmegaWebLink &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.1=&lt;br /&gt;
Available September 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct Lock operation after takeover &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Blade detection does not operate properly. If Blade flashes Red-Red-Blue-repeat the installer will need to set installer feature #12 to 2nd or 3rd option so Blade port is in iData protocol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.2=&lt;br /&gt;
Available April 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct auto data protocol select when Blade is present &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allow Lock operation during Vehicle Learn for some PTS vehicles &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct analog hood trigger input RS shutdown process in RS-X70 units &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1+1 button remotes will allow Unlock Only when programed with installer feature #13 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.3=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Latch output option for Channel 4&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
High Temp RS feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 programmable temperature settings for Low Temp starting and 4 programmable temperature settings for High Temp&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Low Volt auto start and Low Battery notification for 2-way TX set to 11.5V&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
No delay to 3rd, 4th, and 5th channel operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.4=&lt;br /&gt;
Available February 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
iData protocol updated to support Linkr-LT1 confirmations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.5=&lt;br /&gt;
Available August 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default runtime now 15 minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default protocol set to Black=iData/Green=DBI&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New TX RS activation options (user feature #8). Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 3 seconds (option 5) &amp;amp; Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 4 seconds (option 6).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(4-button &amp;amp; 2-button TX only, 1-button will be set to press 2x when these options are selected)&lt;br /&gt;
Lift gate status via data causing 3 chirps on arm fixed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pulse Ignition On Disarm (installer feature #14) will now pulse the Ignition &amp;amp; Accessory outputs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 2-way confirmation will work when Green/Red &amp;amp; Green/Black are NOT set to CH4 or CH5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Glow Plug State via iData protocol. Start time will be controlled by Glow Plug State when feature is supported by bypass module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
M/T setup (installer feature #11) mode now has 2 new options. Shut down and lock on door close (option 3) &amp;amp; Shut down and lock 10 seconds after door close (option 4)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Tach Learn process:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Start engine with the key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hold Brake pedal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press and release valet button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Entering tach learn will confirm with 5 chirps/light flashes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid tach signal is present system will set Engine Detection to Tach and learn tach&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Release Brake or turn Ignition OFF to exit tach learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Old and New Tach Learn process will switch Engine Detection feature to tach wire and learn valid tach &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; valid signal is present&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer reports 5 chirps after starting vehicle. New tach learn process can be triggered &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;IF&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the customer pulses the brake pedal after starting the car.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=v1.6=&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2019&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not recognize 2 ACC circuits - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not setting Engine Detection (Installer Feature #3) or Data Protocol (Installer Feature #12) after update - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware version now indicated by LED upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Seconds after power up the status LED will give long and short flashes to indicate unit firmware version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; One long flash followed by six short flashes = V1.6&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor pre-warn is now 4 chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3D sensor will ONLY be monitored when any reservation mode (installer Feature #11) option is selected&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Horn output (User Feature #5) now defaulted to Human Panic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pit-Stop and Reservation Mode setup required the key to be on for more than 10 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tach Learn (key ON, Brake 5x) will NOT function after RS takeover.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL Step 6 extended from 20 seconds to 60 seconds. More time to get away from the car with a PTS fob. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New Alarm Test Mode:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press &amp;amp; Hold the Valet button.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Within 1.5 seconds press lock on the remote. (any arm command, &#039;&#039;ex. OE remote, Telematics Lock/Arm command&#039;&#039;, etc, will work)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Status LED will begin to flash rapidly.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The siren/horn will chirp upon any zone trigger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 Chirp - Sensor Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:2 Chirps - Hood Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:3 Chirps - Door Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:4 Chirps - Pre-warn Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps are thru Horn/Siren ONLY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Chirps will repeat every 2 seconds for the duration of the trigger, meaning, if the alarm detects hood open the siren will chirp 2 times every 2 seconds till the hood is closed.&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple zones are triggered the chirps will alternate between all triggered zones every 2 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press Lock or Unlock or power cycle the alarm to exit Alarm Test Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: There is no anti-nuisance prevention in this mode. Chirps will continue till the zone is cleared, the mode is exited, the alarm is powered down, or the end of time, which ever comes first.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode if operational with or without alarm functions &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Sensor Test mode does NOT confirm thru 2-way remotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New VL Process&#039;&#039;&#039;(changes &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Underlined&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;pressing the valet button 3x within 5 seconds&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;, the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: If needed, press valet button to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Manual&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;: Manual Transmission, Release parking brake, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected (see above). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set the parking brake again, the system will chirp/flash lights to indicate the setting of Installer Feature #11 (Default 2x).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Release and re-set parking brake to select desired MT Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1 chirp=MT Mode w/ shut down on door lock from remote, 2 chirps=MT Mode OFF (Default), 3 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down on door close, 4 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down 10 sec after door close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Activate RS and exit the vehicle, the engine will shut down according to the option chosen (when locked, after door closed, or 10 sec after door closed) .&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;60&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; sec. of Step 5, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;AFTER&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the brake pedal is pressed before the engine running condition (10 seconds after crank) is met, no settings will be saved and VL must be done again.&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Remote Update=&lt;br /&gt;
All 2-way remotes turn off the receiver until an arm confirmation is received to extend battery life.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Any unlock confirmation will turn off receiver in 2-way remotes. This means if you arm CAR 1 than switch to CAR 2 and disarm the receiver in the remote will be off. You will not receive alerts from CAR 1 unless you arm CAR 2 or switch to CAR 1 and do a status update (&amp;quot;P&amp;quot; then Lock). This is normal operation.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative CAR1/CAR2 switching. Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then Unlock to change between CAR1/CAR2. Holding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; and Lock or Unlock will still switch CAR1/CAR2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 3 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 4 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; twice then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 5 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; three times then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New remote firmware identification:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1110 V1.3 = LED flash and chirp upon power up. Long followed by 3 short(s) = v1.3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.2 = New RS tone played upon power up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1510 v1.3 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the clock will display the firmware version, v1.x.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:1511 v1.2 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the lock LED will flash once and the unlock LED will flash twice for v1.2.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current HHU Firmware:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1110 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1510 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1511 - v1.2 (v1.3 in testing)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 5 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 short beep.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Release all buttons within 3 seconds, and then press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 1 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Remove battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold button and insert battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Hold button approx 3 sec.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;*1110 Reset Tip:&#039;&#039; With PCB still in front half of remote case place paper under battery contact. Hold button and remove paper to easily perform reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=2-Way Antenna Update=&lt;br /&gt;
REC-2N9-3D updated with new IC (11/2019). No operational changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New IC noted by Red dot on tab below 4-pin connector&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[image:{UP(70-series)}REC-2N9_Update.gif|medium|REC-2N9-3D_Update_Marking]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=4</id>
		<title>70-series</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=4"/>
		<updated>2020-01-03T14:34:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: /* New 70 Series Features */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==New 70 Series Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; - Turn the ignition &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;, immediately press the valet button 10 times. After long siren chirp/horn honk press Lock &amp;amp; Unlock together on the remote or press the Brake Pedal 5 times. The system will chirp twice and exit programming with all features set to OEM defaults.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To ignore 3D motion from antenna or sensor disconnect Neutral Safety and perform VL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;V1.6 will ignore 3D motion unless M/T reservation mode (Installer Feature #11) is set to one of the Manual Transmission options.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Vehicle Learn (See V1.6 for new process)==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (Default: 1x = Gasoline).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: __If needed__, press valet to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. (&#039;&#039;This step was left out of some early production manuals&#039;&#039;)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF The system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within 20 sec. of Step 4, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: OPTIONAL: To enable Manual Transmission Reservation mode, set the parking brake. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (The BLACK/WHITE wire must be connected to the parking brake.) System should chirp/flash lights 1x. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 8&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;__AFTER__&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
     TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Notes===&lt;br /&gt;
With Green/Red and Green/Black not programed as CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 (Feature 10/18) the two way remote will not confirm CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 operation but the data output (Left Sliding Door and Gas Cap) will still operate.(fixed in v1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Installer Feature #20 (Low Current Mode) does not program via WebLink. (Fixed in V1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When using AU-84TDP you must not use Black/White (Neutral Safety) and go thru VL to prevent false 3D status. (fixed in AU-84TDP firmware update){br}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When using data module for door triggers on X70 the Zone Violation Recall will show Hood (2 Flashes) for door trigger. Door triggers report properly from data module with XX70-B. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When connected to I IGN and 2 ACC circuits VL will not learn properly. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any time updates are done thru WebLink the current feature settings of the unit are maintained. To see new default settings you must power the brain and do a system reset.[70-series|http://wiki.wiresheet.com/70-series?NoRedirect=1#New_HA_Series_Features_9]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==v1.0==&lt;br /&gt;
Available July 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Original Release &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Progressive Voltage - monitor battery voltage (0.3V increase from rest) for 1 min after RS then ignore any voltage change for the remaining RS runtime&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Vehicle Learn process (See Below)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New antennas and remotes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All units have temp sensor included &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can not configure features via OmegaWebLink &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==v1.1==&lt;br /&gt;
Available September 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct Lock operation after takeover &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Blade detection does not operate properly. If Blade flashes Red-Red-Blue-repeat the installer will need to set installer feature #12 to 2nd or 3rd option so Blade port is in iData protocol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==v1.2==&lt;br /&gt;
Available April 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct auto data protocol select when Blade is present &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allow Lock operation during Vehicle Learn for some PTS vehicles &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct analog hood trigger input RS shutdown process in RS-X70 units &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1+1 button remotes will allow Unlock Only when programed with installer feature #13 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==v1.3==&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Latch output option for Channel 4&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
High Temp RS feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 programmable temperature settings for Low Temp starting and 4 programmable temperature settings for High Temp&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Low Volt auto start and Low Battery notification for 2-way TX set to 11.5V&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
No delay to 3rd, 4th, and 5th channel operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==v1.4==&lt;br /&gt;
Available February 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
iData protocol updated to support Linkr-LT1 confirmations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==v1.5==&lt;br /&gt;
Available August 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default runtime now 15 minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default protocol set to Black=iData/Green=DBI&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New TX RS activation options (user feature #8). Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 3 seconds (option 5) &amp;amp; Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 4 seconds (option 6).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
       (4-button &amp;amp; 2-button TX only, 1-button will be set to press 2x when these options are selected)&lt;br /&gt;
Lift gate status via data causing 3 chirps on arm fixed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pulse Ignition On Disarm (installer feature #14) will now pulse the Ignition &amp;amp; Accessory outputs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 2-way confirmation will work when Green/Red &amp;amp; Green/Black are NOT set to CH4 or CH5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Glow Plug State via iData protocol. Start time will be controlled by Glow Plug State when feature is supported by bypass module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
M/T setup (installer feature #11) mode now has 2 new options. Shut down and lock on door close (option 3) &amp;amp; Shut down and lock 10 seconds after door close (option 4)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Tach Learn process:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Start engine with the key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hold Brake pedal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press and release valet button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Entering tach learn will confirm with 5 chirps/light flashes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; __&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;__ valid tach signal is present system will set Engine Detection to Tach and learn tach&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Release Brake or turn Ignition OFF to exit tach learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Old and New Tach Learn process will switch Engine Detection feature to tach wire and learn valid tach __&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;__ valid signal is present&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer reports 5 chirps after starting vehicle. New tach learn process can be triggered &#039;&#039;&#039;__IF__&#039;&#039;&#039; the customer pulses the brake pedal after starting the car.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==v1.6==&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2019&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not recognize 2 ACC circuits - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not setting Engine Detection (Installer Feature #3) or Data Protocol (Installer Feature #12) after update - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware version now indicated by LED upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     2 Seconds after power up the status LED will give long and short flashes to indicate unit firmware version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     Example: One long flash followed by six short flashes = V1.6&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor pre-warn is now 4 chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3D sensor will ONLY be monitored when any reservation mode (installer Feature #11) option is selected&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Horn output (User Feature #5) now defaulted to Human Panic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pit-Stop and Reservation Mode setup required the key to be on for more than 10 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tach Learn (key ON, Brake 5x) will NOT function after RS takeover.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL Step 6 extended from 20 seconds to 60 seconds. More time to get away from the car with a PTS fob. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New Alarm Test Mode:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press &amp;amp; Hold the Valet button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Within 1.5 seconds press lock on the remote. (any arm command, &#039;&#039;ex. OE remote, Telematics Lock/Arm command&#039;&#039;, etc, will work)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     Status LED will begin to flash rapidly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The siren/horn will chirp upon any zone trigger.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      1 Chirp - Sensor Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      2 Chirps - Hood Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      3 Chirps - Door Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      4 Chirps - Pre-warn Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      Chirps are thru Horn/Siren ONLY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      Chirps will repeat every 2 seconds for the duration of the trigger, meaning, if the alarm detects hood open the siren will chirp 2 times every 2 seconds till the hood is closed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      If multiple zones are triggered the chirps will alternate between all triggered zones every 2 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press Lock or Unlock or power cycle the alarm to exit Alarm Test Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: There is no anti-nuisance prevention in this mode. Chirps will continue till the zone is cleared, the mode is exited, the alarm is powered down, or the end of time, which ever comes first.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor Test mode if operational with or without alarm functions &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor Test mode does NOT confirm thru 2-way remotes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New VL Process&#039;&#039;&#039;(changes __Underlined__)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by __pressing the valet button 3x within 5 seconds__, the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (Default: 1x = Gasoline).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: If needed, press valet button to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest. &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;__Step 5 &#039;&#039;Manual&#039;&#039;__&#039;&#039;&#039;: __Manual Transmission__, __Release parking brake, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected (see above).__ &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     __Set the parking brake again, the system will chirp/flash lights to indicate the setting of Installer Feature #11 (Default 2x).__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     __Release and re-set parking brake to select desired MT Mode.__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     __1 chirp=MT Mode w/ shut down on door lock from remote, 2 chirps=MT Mode OFF (Default), 3 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down on door close, 4 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down 10 sec after door close.__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     __Activate RS and exit the vehicle, the engine will shut down according to the option chosen (when locked, after door closed, or 10 sec after door closed) .__&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within __60__ sec. of Step 5, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;__AFTER__&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
    __If the brake pedal is pressed before the engine running condition (10 seconds after crank) is met, no settings will be saved and VL must be done again.__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==2-Way Remote Update==&lt;br /&gt;
All 2-way remotes turn off the receiver until an arm confirmation is received to extend battery life.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &#039;&#039;Any unlock confirmation will turn off receiver in 2-way remotes. This means if you arm CAR 1 than switch to CAR 2 and disarm the receiver in the remote will be off. You will not receive alerts from CAR 1 unless you arm CAR 2 or switch to CAR 1 and do a status update (&amp;quot;P&amp;quot; then Lock). This is normal operation.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative CAR1/CAR2 switching. Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then Unlock to change between CAR1/CAR2. Holding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; and Lock or Unlock will still switch CAR1/CAR2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 3 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 4 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; twice then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 5 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; three times then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New remote firmware identification:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          1110 V1.3 = LED flash and chirp upon power up. Long followed by 3 short(s) = v1.3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          1510 v1.2 = New RS tone played upon power up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          1510 v1.3 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the clock will display the firmware version, v1.x.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          1511 v1.2 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the lock LED will flash once and the unlock LED will flash twice for v1.2.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current HHU Firmware:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1110 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1510 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1511 - v1.2 (v1.3 in testing)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 5 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    Piazo will sound 1 short beep.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Release all buttons within 3 seconds, and then press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 1 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Remove battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold button and insert battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Hold button approx 3 sec.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &#039;&#039;*1110 Reset Tip:&#039;&#039; With PCB still in front half of remote case place paper under battery contact. Hold button and remove paper to easily perform reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==2-Way Antenna Update==&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
REC-2N9-3D updated with new IC (11/2019). No operational changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New IC noted by Red dot on tab below 4-pin connector&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[image:{UP(70-series)}REC-2N9_Update.gif|medium|REC-2N9-3D_Update_Marking]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=3</id>
		<title>70-series</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=70-series&amp;diff=3"/>
		<updated>2020-01-02T21:33:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: Created page with &amp;quot;==New 70 Series Features== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Feature Reset&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Turn the ignition &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;, immediately press the valet button 10 times. After long siren chirp/horn honk press Lock &amp;amp;...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==New 70 Series Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Feature Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; - Turn the ignition &amp;quot;on&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;off&amp;quot;, immediately press the valet button 10 times. After long siren chirp/horn honk press Lock &amp;amp; Unlock together on the remote or press the Brake Pedal 5 times. The system will chirp twice and exit programming with all features set to OEM defaults.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To ignore 3D motion from antenna or sensor disconnect Neutral Safety and perform VL&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;V1.6 will ignore 3D motion unless M/T reservation mode (Installer Feature #11) is set to one of the Manual Transmission options.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Vehicle Learn (See V1.6 for new process)===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (Default: 1x = Gasoline). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: __If needed__, press valet to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. (&#039;&#039;This step was left out of some early production manuals&#039;&#039;)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF The system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within 20 sec. of Step 4, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: OPTIONAL: To enable Manual Transmission Reservation mode, set the parking brake. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (The BLACK/WHITE wire must be connected to the parking brake.) System should chirp/flash lights 1x. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 8&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;__AFTER__&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
          TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Notes===&lt;br /&gt;
With Green/Red and Green/Black not programed as CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 (Feature 10/18) the two way remote will not confirm CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 operation but the data output (Left Sliding Door and Gas Cap) will still operate.(fixed in v1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Installer Feature #20 (Low Current Mode) does not program via WebLink. (Fixed in V1.5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{br}&lt;br /&gt;
When using AU-84TDP you must not use Black/White (Neutral Safety) and go thru VL to prevent false 3D status. (fixed in AU-84TDP firmware update){br}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When using data module for door triggers on X70 the Zone Violation Recall will show Hood (2 Flashes) for door trigger. Door triggers report properly from data module with XX70-B. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When connected to I IGN and 2 ACC circuits VL will not learn properly. (fixed in v1.6)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any time updates are done thru WebLink the current feature settings of the unit are maintained. To see new default settings you must power the brain and do a system reset.[70-series|http://wiki.wiresheet.com/70-series?NoRedirect=1#New_HA_Series_Features_9]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;br /&gt;
===v1.0===&lt;br /&gt;
Available July 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Original Release &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Progressive Voltage - monitor battery voltage (0.3V increase from rest) for 1 min after RS then ignore any voltage change for the remaining RS runtime&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Vehicle Learn process (See Below)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New antennas and remotes &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All units have temp sensor included &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Can not configure features via OmegaWebLink &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;br /&gt;
===v1.1===&lt;br /&gt;
Available September 2016&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct Lock operation after takeover &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Blade detection does not operate properly. If Blade flashes Red-Red-Blue-repeat the installer will need to set installer feature #12 to 2nd or 3rd option so Blade port is in iData protocol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;br /&gt;
===v1.2===&lt;br /&gt;
Available April 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct auto data protocol select when Blade is present &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allow Lock operation during Vehicle Learn for some PTS vehicles &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Correct analog hood trigger input RS shutdown process in RS-X70 units &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1+1 button remotes will allow Unlock Only when programed with installer feature #13 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;br /&gt;
===v1.3===&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2017&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Latch output option for Channel 4&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
High Temp RS feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 programmable temperature settings for Low Temp starting and 4 programmable temperature settings for High Temp&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Low Volt auto start and Low Battery notification for 2-way TX set to 11.5V&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
No delay to 3rd, 4th, and 5th channel operation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;br /&gt;
===v1.4===&lt;br /&gt;
Available February 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
iData protocol updated to support Linkr-LT1 confirmations&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;br /&gt;
===v1.5===&lt;br /&gt;
Available August 2018&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default runtime now 15 minutes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Default protocol set to Black=iData/Green=DBI&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New TX RS activation options (user feature #8). Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 3 seconds (option 5) &amp;amp; Press &amp;amp; Hold RS button for 4 seconds (option 6).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
       (4-button &amp;amp; 2-button TX only, 1-button will be set to press 2x when these options are selected)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lift gate status via data causing 3 chirps on arm fixed&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pulse Ignition On Disarm (installer feature #14) will now pulse the Ignition &amp;amp; Accessory outputs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
CH4 &amp;amp; CH5 2-way confirmation will work when Green/Red &amp;amp; Green/Black are NOT set to CH4 or CH5&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Support for Glow Plug State via iData protocol. Start time will be controlled by Glow Plug State when feature is supported by bypass module&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
M/T setup (installer feature #11) mode now has 2 new options. Shut down and lock on door close (option 3) &amp;amp; Shut down and lock 10 seconds after door close (option 4)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New Tach Learn process:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Start engine with the key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Hold Brake pedal&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press and release valet button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Entering tach learn will confirm with 5 chirps/light flashes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;5.&#039;&#039;&#039; __&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;__ valid tach signal is present system will set Engine Detection to Tach and learn tach&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;6.&#039;&#039;&#039; Release Brake or turn Ignition OFF to exit tach learn&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Old and New Tach Learn process will switch Engine Detection feature to tach wire and learn valid tach __&#039;&#039;&#039;IF&#039;&#039;&#039;__ valid signal is present&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Customer reports 5 chirps after starting vehicle. New tach learn process can be triggered &#039;&#039;&#039;__IF__&#039;&#039;&#039; the customer pulses the brake pedal after starting the car.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===v1.6===&lt;br /&gt;
Available June 2019&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not recognize 2 ACC circuits - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL not setting Engine Detection (Installer Feature #3) or Data Protocol (Installer Feature #12) after update - fixed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Firmware version now indicated by LED upon power up&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     2 Seconds after power up the status LED will give long and short flashes to indicate unit firmware version&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     Example: One long flash followed by six short flashes = V1.6&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor pre-warn is now 4 chirps.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3D sensor will ONLY be monitored when any reservation mode (installer Feature #11) option is selected&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Horn output (User Feature #5) now defaulted to Human Panic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pit-Stop and Reservation Mode setup required the key to be on for more than 10 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tach Learn (key ON, Brake 5x) will NOT function after RS takeover.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VL Step 6 extended from 20 seconds to 60 seconds. More time to get away from the car with a PTS fob. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New Alarm Test Mode:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press &amp;amp; Hold the Valet button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2.&#039;&#039;&#039; Within 1.5 seconds press lock on the remote. (any arm command, &#039;&#039;ex. OE remote, Telematics Lock/Arm command&#039;&#039;, etc, will work)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     Status LED will begin to flash rapidly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3.&#039;&#039;&#039; The siren/horn will chirp upon any zone trigger.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      1 Chirp - Sensor Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      2 Chirps - Hood Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      3 Chirps - Door Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      4 Chirps - Pre-warn Trigger&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      Chirps are thru Horn/Siren ONLY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      Chirps will repeat every 2 seconds for the duration of the trigger, meaning, if the alarm detects hood open the siren will chirp 2 times every 2 seconds till the hood is closed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      If multiple zones are triggered the chirps will alternate between all triggered zones every 2 seconds.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;4.&#039;&#039;&#039; Press Lock or Unlock or power cycle the alarm to exit Alarm Test Mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: There is no anti-nuisance prevention in this mode. Chirps will continue till the zone is cleared, the mode is exited, the alarm is powered down, or the end of time, which ever comes first.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor Test mode if operational with or without alarm functions &amp;quot;ON&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sensor Test mode does NOT confirm thru 2-way remotes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New VL Process&#039;&#039;&#039;(changes __Underlined__)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 1&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key ON (do not start). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 2&#039;&#039;&#039;: Activate remote start by __pressing the valet button 3x within 5 seconds__, the remote, input activation wire, or smartphone control. The system will chirp/flash lights to indicate engine type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (Default: 1x = Gasoline).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 3&#039;&#039;&#039;: If needed, press valet button to change engine type: The system will chirp/flash lights to confirm each selection. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     1 chirp=Gasoline, 2 chirps=Diesel 15, 3 chirps=Diesel 20, 4 chirps=Diesel 30.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 4&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the vehicle with the ignition key. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 5 &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: Turn the ignition key OFF, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     (Max: 4x). EXAMPLE: If you connected the PINK, VIOLET, &amp;amp; ORANGE wires, the system should chirp 3x. If it only chirps 2x, one connection has a problem and should be checked, then start over at Step 1 to retest. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;__Step 5 &#039;&#039;Manual&#039;&#039;__&#039;&#039;&#039;: __Manual Transmission__, __Release parking brake, the system will chirp/flash lights for the # of IGN/ACC/START circuits detected (see above).__ &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     __Set the parking brake again, the system will chirp/flash lights to indicate the setting of Installer Feature #11 (Default 2x).__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     __Release and re-set parking brake to select desired MT Mode.__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     __1 chirp=MT Mode w/ shut down on door lock from remote, 2 chirps=MT Mode OFF (Default), 3 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down on door close, 4 chirps=MT Mode w/ shut down 10 sec after door close.__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     __Activate RS and exit the vehicle, the engine will shut down according to the option chosen (when locked, after door closed, or 10 sec after door closed) .__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 6&#039;&#039;&#039;: Within __60__ sec. of Step 5, Activate remote start. Wait until engine is running and LED is flashing slow. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     The system will poll both data ports for modules using the DBI protocol. If they do not respond, it will automatically switch to iDatalink protocol. - After the engine is running, the system will look for data tach &amp;amp; tach wire availability. If detected, the system will switch to that method. If not, it will remain in tachless-hi. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Step 7&#039;&#039;&#039;: TO SAVE SETTINGS: Shut down RS by pressing the BRAKE pedal &#039;&#039;&#039;__AFTER__&#039;&#039;&#039; the status LED begins slow flash.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      This disables VEHICLE LEARN (installer feature #2).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
    __If the brake pedal is pressed before the engine running condition (10 seconds after crank) is met, no settings will be saved and VL must be done again.__&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          TO CANCEL/START OVER: Shut down RS by remote or input wire.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;br /&gt;
===2-Way Remote Update===&lt;br /&gt;
All 2-way remotes turn off the receiver until an arm confirmation is received to extend battery life.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &#039;&#039;Any unlock confirmation will turn off receiver in 2-way remotes. This means if you arm CAR 1 than switch to CAR 2 and disarm the receiver in the remote will be off. You will not receive alerts from CAR 1 unless you arm CAR 2 or switch to CAR 1 and do a status update (&amp;quot;P&amp;quot; then Lock). This is normal operation.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative CAR1/CAR2 switching. Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then Unlock to change between CAR1/CAR2. Holding &amp;quot;P&amp;quot; and Lock or Unlock will still switch CAR1/CAR2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 3 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 4 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; twice then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative channel 5 activation: Press and release &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; three times then press the Trunk button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New remote firmware identification:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          1110 V1.3 = LED flash and chirp upon power up. Long followed by 3 short(s) = v1.3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          1510 v1.2 = New RS tone played upon power up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          1510 v1.3 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the clock will display the firmware version, v1.x.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          1511 v1.2 and newer = Upon entering programming on the remote (Hold the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;P&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; button for 3 seconds) the lock LED will flash once and the unlock LED will flash twice for v1.2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current HHU Firmware:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1110 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1510 - v1.3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1511 - v1.2 (v1.3 in testing)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{br}&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 5 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    Piazo will sound 1 short beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Release all buttons within 3 seconds, and then press Lock, Unlock, Trunk, &amp;amp; Start for 1 second again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To clear Alarm ID from the 1 button 2-way remotes:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Remove battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Hold button and insert battery.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Hold button approx 3 sec.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    Piazo will sound 1 long beep.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &#039;&#039;*1110 Reset Tip:&#039;&#039; With PCB still in front half of remote case place paper under battery contact. Hold button and remove paper to easily perform reset.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===2-Way Antenna Update===&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
REC-2N9-3D updated with new IC (11/2019). No operational changes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New IC noted by Red dot on tab below 4-pin connector&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[image:{UP(70-series)}REC-2N9_Update.gif|medium|REC-2N9-3D_Update_Marking]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{TOP}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=2</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.omegadealer.com/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=2"/>
		<updated>2020-01-02T20:51:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Liz D: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;MediaWiki has been installed.&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome&#039;&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;This Wiki is only available to Omega support staff and Omega&#039;s authorized partners.&#039;&#039;&#039; It&#039;s designed to help guide you through installation, setup, &amp;amp; programming of Omega products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions, concerns, suggestions, keep them to yourself......OR......contact Shawn Cooper at [mailto:shawnc@caralarm.com|shawnc@caralarm.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Have fun!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&#039;&#039;&#039;Categories&#039;&#039;&#039;===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[70-series|70 Series]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[RFK-XX-SST]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[OL-RF-XX-SST]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[OL-HRN-RS Harnesses]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[CrimeStopper]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Linkr-M1]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Linkr-LT]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Product Testing]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SS3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User&#039;s Guide] for information on using the wiki software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Getting started ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Liz D</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>